Unite.d States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Environmental Research
Laboratory
Corvallis OR 97333
EPA/600/3-89/060
July 1989
Research and Development
Regionalization as a
Tool for Managing
Environmental
Resources

-------

-------
                                              EPA/600/3-89/060
                                              July 1989
REGIONALIZATION AS A TOOL FOR MANAGING
         ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES
                       by
                 Alisa L. Gallant1
               Thomas R. Whittier1
                 David P. Larsen2
                James M. Omernik2
                Robert M. Hughes1
                  June 22, 1989
        1NSI Technology Services Corporation
    U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory
                200 SW 35th Street
              Corvallis, Oregon 97333

       2U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
        Environmental Research Laboratory
                200 SW 35th Street
              Corvallis, Oregon 97333

-------
                                       ABSTRACT

     Many environmental resource managers have recognized the need for regional management
frameworks.  The natural and human-imposed characteristics governing environmental resources
vary throughout the country, likewise altering the issues of concern.  There are, however, areas
(regions), definable  at any resolution, within which these characteristics and concerns are relatively
homogeneous. By mapping these areas, a regional management framework can be developed. The
purpose of this report is to explain the concept and nature of regions and the utility of a  regional
framework for resource  management.   In this  report we (1) discuss  the nature of regions and
boundaries, (2) review some of the more popular regional frameworks, pointing out their attributes
and limitations, (3) explain our synoptic approach for defining regions, and provide examples where
the approach was applied to assess surface water quality, (4) describe the  process for selecting
regionally representative reference sites,  (5) demonstrate methods of analyzing data from such sites
for extrapolating results to larger areas, (6) examine ways that an ecoregional framework was applied
to establish water resource criteria  in accord with regional capacities for buffering environmental
changes, and (7) propose other areas of  management that might  benefit from regional assessment
techniques.
         The research described in this report has been funded wholly or in part by the
         U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under contract number 68-C8-006 to NSI
         Technology Services.  The report has been subject to the Agency's peer and
         administrative  review and has  been approved  for  publication as an  EPA
         document. Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute
         endorsement or recommendation for use.
                                            11

-------
                                       CONTENTS
                                                                               Page
Abstract	u
Figures	v
Tables 	  v"
Plates	  v"
Terminology	•	yii
Acknowledgments	xi
Executive Summary  	xii

1.   THE CONCEPT OF REGIONS	  1
     1.1   Introduction	1
     1.2   Purpose and Scope	2
     1.3   Factors Affecting Regional Representation  	3
     1.4   Regional Reference Sites  	5
     1.5   Factors Affecting the Delineation of Regions  	7
          1.5.1    Origin of Regional Reference Maps	  7
          1.5.2    Quality and Resolution of Reference Maps	8
          1.5.3    Approaches to Delineating Regions  	9
     1.6   Examples of Environmental Regions   	  12
          1.6.1    Maps Depicting Specific Environmental Characteristics	  12
          1.6.2    Maps Based on Combinations of Characteristics  	  13
     1.7   Section Summary	  14

2.   DEVELOPMENT OF ECOREGIONS OF THE CONTERMINOUS
     UNITED STATES	  15
     2.1   Introduction	  15
     2.2   Background	  15
     2.3   An Overview of Regionalization	  16
     2.4   Specific Examples of Regionalization  	20
          2.4.1    Ecoregions of the Conterminous United States  	20
          2.4.2   Ecological Subregions of Colorado	25
     2.5   Section Summary	41

3.   REGIONAL EVALUATION USING ENVIRONMENTAL DATA  	42
     3.1   Introduction	42
     3.2   Data Sources for Regional Evaluation 	42
     3.3   Data Requirements	43

                                            iii

-------
Section
Page
          3.3.1    Geographic Coverage	44
          3.3.2    Data Completeness	45
          3.3.3    Data Quality	46
    3.4   Regional Sampling   	47
    3.5   Regional Data Analysis	48
          3.5.1    Water Chemistry Analysis  	49
          3.5.2    Analysis of Aquatic Biota  	53
    3.6   Screening and Using Available Data	62
          3.6.1    Available Water Chemistry Data	62
          3.6.2    Available Biological Data	74
    3.7   Section Summary	80

4.  APPLICATIONS OF A REGIONAL APPROACH   	81
    4.1   Introduction	81
    4.2   Water  Quality Standards   	81
          4.2.1    Arkansas   	82
          4.2.2    Ohio	83
          4.2.3    Minnesota	89
    4.3   Water  Body Monitoring,  Assessment, and Reporting	92
          4.3.1    Monitoring Design	92
          4.3.2    Assessment of Aquatic Life Use Attainment  	94
          4.3.3    Synthesis and Reporting  of Water Quality Monitoring Data ....  98
    4.4   Potential Applications and Future Directions	  113
    4.5   Section Summary	  121

5.  REPORT SUMMARY	  122

6.  LITERATURE CITED  	  124

APPENDICES
    A  -   References Used to Define and Delineate  Ecological Subregions of
          Colorado	  144
    B -   Study  Designs Used by State Agencies in Arkansas and Ohio	147
                                            IV

-------
                                         FIGURES
Number                                                                           Eage
2-1     Flow chart illustrating the steps in regionalization ......................  17
2-2     Spatial distributions of four environmental characteristics
        used to delineate the Sand Hills Ecoregion  ...........................  24
3-1     Spatial patterns of total phosphorus in Ohio streams  ....................  50
3-2     Selected nutrient measures of water quality in Ohio
        ecoregions [[[  51
3-3     Regional patterns in nutrient richness and ionic strength
        variables measured in Ohio streams   ................................  54
3-4     Fish species richness of streams in Ohio ecoregions .....................  56
3-5     Boxplots of the site maximum Index  of Biotic Integrity
        scores for regional reference sites in  Ohio ecoregions  ...................  57
3-6     Relative abundances of 24 fish species in Ohio ecoregions  ................  59
3-7     Dominant fish species in Ohio stream samples .........................  60
3-8     Ordination showing regional differences in fish assemblages
        of Oregon streams .............................................  61
 3-9    Number of STORET ambient stream stations in Colorado
        counties  [[[  64
3-10    Regional patterns of conductivity in  Colorado streams  ..................  69
3-11     Regional patterns of Kjeldahl-nitrogen in Colorado streams  ..............  70
3-12    Regional patterns in stream nutrient  richness and ionic
        strength in Colorado streams  .....................................  72
3-13    Regional patterns of total phosp'horus, conductivity, and
        nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen in 48 Colorado stream sites  .... .................  73
3-14    Regional relative frequency of occurrence of fish in
        Colorado streams   .............................................  78
 4-1    Dissolved oxygen standards for Arkansas streams during the
        critical season (late summer low flow) ..............................  85
 4-2    Illustration of how the Ohio Environmental Protection Agency
        uses biocriteria to interpret the significance of an
        environmental impact ..........................................  95
 4-3    Summary of characteristics in regionally representative areas in
        Minnesota ecoregions  ..........................................  101
 4-4    Boxplots of regional differences in surface area and maximum depth
        for Minnesota lakes ... .........................................  102

-------
4-6    Regional differences in lake water quality in Minnesota based
       on a survey of least impacted lakes	104
4-7    Boxplots of total phosphorus concentrations by fishery ecological
       class in Minnesota ecoregions	106
4-8    Correspondence between user perception and measured lake quality
       in Minnesota ecoregions  	107
4-9    Comparison of selected regional water quality attributes in
       Minnesota streams	109
                                             VI

-------
                                        TABLES

Number                                                                         Page
 3-1      STORET Parameter Codes that Appear to be Related to Total Dissolved
         Solids Concentrations	  66
 4-1      Regional Temperature and Turbidity Criteria for Arkansas Streams	  84
 4-2      Summary of Arkansas' Descriptions of Fish Communities in Reference
         Streams	  86
 4-3      Biocriteria  for Streams in the Proposed Ohio Water Quality
         Standards Regulations  	  90
 4-4      The Ohio Environmental Protection Agency's Comparison of Percent of
         Stream Segments Attaining Aquatic Life  Uses, Based on Biosurvey
         and In-stream Chemical Data	  97
 4-5      Trends in Stream Water Quality for the Period  1973-1985  in Minnesota
         Ecoregions	  110
 4-6      Preliminary Estimates of Attainable Stream Water Quality in
         Minnesota  Ecoregions  	  111
 4-7      Ecoregion  Variables Used in the Minnesota Lake Phosphorus  Model
         MINLEAP	  112
 4-8      Overview and Summary of Regional Characteristics and Management
         Goals in Two Contrasting Minnesota Ecoregions	  114
 4-9     Most Sensitive  Lake Uses and Suggested  Phosphorus Criteria for
         Minnesota  Ecoregions  	  117
                                         PLATES
 Number
  1      Ecological subregions of Colorado
  2      Conductivity of streams  in Colorado
  3      Kjeldahl-nitrogen concentrations in streams in Colorado
                                            VII

-------
                                      TERMINOLOGY

This list provides general working definitions  of some of the  terms  used in this report.

  Aquatic life use - A designated  water body use that specifies the protection and propagation of
      fish, shellfish, and wildlife  (40 CFR Part 13).
  Attainable  quality - A concept  based on the expected condition of a resource as sustained by
      natural environmental characteristics unaltered by human perturbation; usually, we can only
      approximate such circumstances by examining sites having minimal interference from human
      influence.
  Biological  criteria   (Biocriteria)  -  Numerical   or  narrative  expressions  of the   biological
      characteristics of ambient  aquatic  communities, often  structural measures  (e.g.,  species
      composition, organism abundance, and diversity).
  Criteria -  Constituent concentrations, levels, or  narrative statements representing a quality of
      water presumed to support  a particular use (40 CFR Parts  35, 120, 131).
  Designated uses - Specified goals for water bodies. These include uses for public water supplies,
      protection and propagation  of fish, shellfish, and wildlife,  recreation in and on the water,
      and agricultural, industrial,  and other purposes (40  CFR 35, 120,  131).
  Detrended  correspondence  analysis  -  An  ordination  technique often used  to  show  the
      relationships among sites based on biological data.
  Dimictic lake -  A lake that undergoes two turnover  events annually (usually in spring and fall),
      resulting in either partial or complete mixing of different  layers of the water.
  Discriminant  analysis  -  Statistical  analysis   for  examining the   influence  of  different
      environmental factors on patterns observed in ordinations.
  Drainage area - See Watershed.
  Ecological  integrity  - The ability of an  ecosystem to sustain  a balanced biotic community.  The
      natural environmental characteristics of the  ecosystem  determine  the nature of its biotic
      community; alterations of physical, chemical, or biological processes within the ecosystem
      can have a major impact on biota,  and thus on ecological  integrity.
  Ecoregion  - An area (region) of relative  homogeneity in ecological systems.
  Ephemeral stream - A stream that flows only in response to major precipitation or meltwater
      events.
  Hypolimnion - The  deep water region below the well-mixed layer in  a lake.
  Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI)  - A measure of  stream ecological  health based on fish species
      richness, composition, abundance, condition, and trophic composition.
  Index of Well  Being (IWB)  -  A measure of fish community health  based  on abundance and
      weight, and the diversity of both.
  Intermittent stream  - A stream that flows (generally) part of every year.
  Invertebrate Community Index (ICI) - A measure of stream health based on several metrics of
      the macroinvertebrate  community.  Uses ecological principles  similar to those of the IBI.

                                             viii

-------
Kjeldahl nitrogen - The sum of the organic and ammonia nitrogen components in water samples.
    High concentration of  nitrogen in surface waters is  not necessarily damaging to aquatic
    biota,  but may  indicate that other,  more deleterious compounds are also present in the
    systems.
Lake total  phosphorus - Total  dissolved and particulate phosphorus  in  lake water samples.
    Phosphorus is essential  to  the growth of organisms, but high concentrations of phosphorus
    may stimulate nuisance quantities of aquatic vegetation.
Least impacted site - A  site at  which conditions represent minimal interference from human
    influence.
Local relief - The elevational change in topography within a 10 km2 area.
Minimally impacted site - See Least impacted site.
Multivariate analysis - Any of a set of statistical techniques for examining many environmental
    factors simultaneously;  we use primarily ordination analyses.
Nonpoint source pollution  - Pollution from diffuse sources of land runoff into water bodies,
    such as from areas of fertilizer and  pesticide application or soil erosion.
Ordination -  A  set  of  statistical  techniques that arrange sites  or environmental  variables
    (chemical, physical, or  biological) in relation to one or more coordinate axes such that their
    positions  relative to the axes and to each other provide maximum information about their
    ecological similarities.
Perennial  stream  -  A stream  that flows  year-round.
Physiography - Pertains  to the genesis, structure, and evolution of landforms.
Point source  pollution -  Pollution originating from a discrete source, such as outflow from a
     pipe or a concentrated animal feeding operation.
Polymictic lake - A lake in which turnover events occur at frequent intervals during the year,
     often daily.
Principal components  analysis - An ordination technique often based on chemical or physical
     data and used to show the relationships  among sites.
Quality assurance/Quality  control (QA/QC)  -  A quality assurance program  sets data quality
     objectives during the  design phase  of a project, focusing on the  levels  of  accuracy and
     precision needed.  Quality control procedures are performed throughout data collection and
     analysis  to meet the objectives specified by the quality assurance plan.
 Reference  sites  -  Areas  (watersheds,  stream  reaches,  lakes,  etc.)  whose  environmental
     characteristics are representative of other areas and whose measured data values are inferred
     to  indicate those of  other areas.
 Region -  An area of relative homogeneity for a particular set of  characteristics.
 Resolution - The level of  detail represented on  a map or in a data set.
 Scale - The ratio of the distance between two points on a map to the distance  between the same
     points on the earth.  The smaller the ratio (fraction), the smaller the map scale.
                                             IX

-------
Spatial distribution  -  The areal arrangement of attributes (e.g., environmental characteristics,
    data values, species, land use types, etc.).
Synoptic approach - A technique for simultaneously evaluating the associations among spatial
    distributions of different environmental characteristics as indicated by numeric or mapped
    data.
Thematic specificity - The objective  of a thematic map is to focus on the structure  of a
    particular  distribution.   The  degree  of uniqueness  of  that  distribution  represents  its
    specificity.
Total organic carbon - The amount of organically bound carbon in a water sample.  High levels
    may indicate organic enrichment that could lead to oxygen depletion as the organic carbon
    is consumed.
Trophic state -  The intensity of primary productivity in a water body, often estimated by the
    nutrient (nitrogen and phosphorus) enrichment  to the water body.
Univariate analysis - Any statistical  technique for examining (environmental) factors singly.
Water quality standards - Standards defining water  quality goals of a water body, or a portion
    thereof, by designating  the  use  or uses  to be  made of the water and by setting criteria
    necessary to protect those uses (40 CFR Parts 35, 120, 131).
Water Quality  Standards Regulation - The Regulation governing  the  development, review,
    revision, and approval of water quality standards under Section 303 of the Water Quality
    Act.
Watershed - An area of land draining to a specific  point on  a stream or to a lake or wetland.

-------
                                  ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

    The  compilation  of this report would not have been possible without  the  assistance  and
perseverance of a number of people.  Andrew Herstrom furnished Geographic Information System
support for the analyses and products presented in this  report.  Janet  McCormick  assembled
graphics and tables, performed data screening arid plotting, and modified  reference maps for use
in delineating  regions.  Sandra Thiele screened data  output for acceptable quality  for analysis of
Colorado stream water resources. She also  helped modify reference maps for regional evaluation,
and  located candidate  regional reference  sites for  the  EPA Region VIII Office in Colorado.
Sandra Azevedo compiled the insert maps on the Geographic Information System and provided
general assistance in plotting data, modifying reference maps, and preparing graphics.  Roze Royce
manipulated incompatible computer files in order to provide word  processing support.  Susan
Christie contributed editorial expertise toward the integrity and layout of the report.  Numerous
state, regional, and headquarters staff supported the project in various ways, contributing insights,
data, and assessment  results, and reviewing our final document for accuracy.  Special thanks go
to the authors and publishers  who granted us permission to reproduce  and,  in  some cases, to
modify a number of  previously published figures and tables for inclusion in our  report.
                                             XI

-------
                                  EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
    REGIONALIZATION AS A TOOL FOR MANAGING ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES
APPLICATIONS OF A REGIONAL APPROACH

    All of us are familiar with different kinds of regions. We recognize political regions, perceiving
the world as a hierarchical set of units:  continents comprising countries comprising states, counties,
cities, districts, and neighborhoods.  We recognize cultural regions, identifying  people  by their
appearance, mannerisms, and speech patterns. We also recognize environmental regions, examining
world biomes, the ecosystems within them, and the smaller habitat types within the ecosystems. In
a more formal sense, a region is associated with a specific location that covers some extent of area
and contains a certain degree of homogeneity with respect to the characteristics used to define it.
Wiken (1986) explains that, "Regionalization is a method of reducing or eliminating  details which do
not, on the average, hold true over large areas."
    The purpose of this report is to explain the concept and nature of regions  and the utility of a
regional framework for resource management. Discussions are divided into four main sections. The
first covers some major components of regional representation, the utility of regional frameworks for
selecting reference sites, principal factors contributing to the delineation process, and examples of
popular regional frameworks. The second introduces the approach used by the U.S. EPA Environ-
mental Research Laboratory in Corvallis, Oregon, to develop environmental regional frameworks for
research and management.  The  third presents  methods for evaluating correspondence  between
regions and patterns in other environmental data and incorporates discussion on data sources, type,
quality, and quantity, regional sampling options, and methods of regional data analysis. The fourth
relates the applicability of regional analysis for addressing state and national management mandates
related to water quality standards and water body monitoring, assessment, and reporting, and briefly
describes additional fields of potential application of a regional approach.
    Our major stimulus for developing an ecoregional framework has come from  a need  to assess
existing and attainable surface water quality. Traditionally, the emphasis has been to set goals based
on chemical or toxicological criteria, and to control point source pollution to protect designated uses
of water bodies by achieving those goals. Recently, increased attention has been  directed toward the
quality of specific receiving waters and ambient biological criteria.   An essential component of
addressing these issues  is a management framework that can be used to:

    •    Compare ecological similarities and differences
    •    Establish meaningful and reasonable physical, chemical, and biological goals and criteria
    •    Select representative sample sites needed for defensible data
    •    Extrapolate results to larger areas
                                            XII

-------
    •   Identify areas that should receive additional resource protection
    •   Predict the effects of management on resource quality

Two states, Arkansas and Ohio, have adopted a  regional framework for  setting chemical and
biological criteria to  supplement the traditional methods of water quality management.  A third
state, Minnesota, has used a  regional framework to organize, present, and interpret water quality
information.

    a.  Arkansas found that in some ecoregions, national criteria could not be achieved even in
        minimally impacted streams, whereas in other ecoregions, the criteria were not  stringent
        enough.  As a result, the state developed regionally specific aquatic life use designations
        and water quality criteria (e.g., for dissolved oxygen, temperature, and turbidity).

    b.  Ohio established ecoregional numerical criteria for biota in streams. The biological criteria
        were based  on the  composition and relative  abundance  of  fish and macroinvertebrate
        assemblages sampled at least impacted regional reference  sites.  These data were used to
        establish regionally attainable criteria for the Index of Biotic Integrity, the Index of Weil-
        Being, and the Invertebrate Community Index, developed to measure the health of fish and
        macroinvertebrate communities.   A comparison of  ambient chemical criteria  versus
        biological criteria to indicate stream impairment showed agreement in  46% of the cases;
        biological criteria indicated greater impairment  than did chemical criteria in 41% of the
        cases; chemical criteria indicated greater impairment than did biological criteria in  12% of
        the cases. Thus, streams meeting chemical criteria cannot necessarily  be assumed to  be
        meeting biological criteria, and vice versa.  It is  necessary to measure both sets of criteria
        in order to make a complete statement about stream conditions.

    c.  Minnesota developed detailed descriptions of the land and waterbody characteristics  of
        each of its seven ecoregions.  For example, in the Northern Lakes and Forests Ecoregion,
        lakes are  generally small, deep, and stratified,  whereas in the agricultural Northern
        Glaciated Plains Ecoregion, lakes are large, shallow, and unstratified.  To evaluate these
        differences, existing lake water quality was analyzed within an ecoregion framework. The
        framework accounted for a substantial part of the spatial  variation in lake water quality,
        particularly  for measures of lake eutrophication, such as total phosphorus.  All measured
        stream water quality variables showed some differences among ecoregions.  The results of
        these assessments are being used to establish different lake quality goals for several of the
        ecoregions.

    Traditionally, an enumerative process has been used to identify and quantify the extent of water
quality problems.  As practiced, this process lacks statistical rigor in that the status of the resources
                                             Xlll

-------
cannot be specified with known precision.  Alternatively, statistically sound survey designs were
developed for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's National Lake Survey and National Stream
Survey projects in order to assess surface waters relative to acidic deposition.  A regional approach
formed the  basis for the survey design, and was incorporated into the subsequent synthesis and
interpretation of monitoring data. Several levels of geographic stratification into regions of greater
homogeneity increased sampling efficiency and allowed estimates to be made with known precision.
In addition,  having  a regional framework  prior to selecting sample sites helped determine  the
allowable coarseness of the sampling frame, so that sites were not located so far apart that important
environmental conditions were unrepresented in the data set.

METHODS  AND EXAMPLES OF REGIONAL DELINEATION

    Regionalization  segregates environmental diversity by delineating areas  within which spatial
variability is less than that occurring in a larger area. Regions can be delineated at any  level of
resolution and customized to suit a variety of management aims. The  quality of a regional frame-
work is influenced by the way the regions are delineated and the choice and quality of information
(e.g., maps)  used to delineate them.  Important considerations for the  development and use of any
regional framework are its resolution and thematic specificity, and the nature of regional boundaries.

    a.    Resolution refers to the amount of detail represented or the  degree  to which the regions
         distinguish patterns at various map scales.  Regions delineated at a national scale may not
         have enough resolution to address many issues at a state level, whereas regions at a state
         level may contain too much detail to be useful at a national level.

    b.    Thematic specificity refers to the degree of focus embodied by the regions.  Regions may
         be very specific, such as those representing concentrations of alkalinity in surface waters,
         or very broad, such as those representing general patterns of  ecosystem homogeneity.

    c.    Boundary precision varies across a regional map. Although boundaries are drawn as distinct
         lines on maps, they are actually transition zones of various widths. Some transition zones
         are as narrow as 2 or 3 km, such as along an abrupt interface between steep mountains and
         flat plains. Other transition zones are more than 75  km wide, reflecting a gradual transition
         from one region to another.
                                            xiv

-------
Methods
    Two basic methods of regionalization involve quantitative and qualitative assessment techniques.

    a.  Quantitative delineation employs a statistical framework for analyzing data for the purpose
        of generating regions.  Data are handled in a predetermined, systematic way, based on the
        initial expert judgment of the person designing the analytical classification scheme.

    b.  Qualitative delineation employs continual,  interactive  expert judgment for selecting,
        analyzing, and classifying data in order to generate regions.  Judgments are based on the
        quantity and quality of the reference data and on interpretation of the relationships among
        environmental factors.

    On first inspection,  a quantitative approach seems  most straightforward and replicative.
However, quantitative  tools are not sufficiently developed  for  incorporating the  multivariate
judgments needed to delineate  regions.  Because associations among environmental variables vary
from  area to area, as does the quality of the data representing those variables, and because regional
changes often occur at geographic boundaries not explicitly detected by statistical point sampling
frames, strict adherence to specified, quantitative interpolation rules commonly results in inaccurate
interpretation of regions.  Judgment should always be  used when assessing the quality and quantity
of data (numerical or mapped)  for use in delineating regions.
    With  a qualitative approach, expert judgment is used to identify and select those factors that
best define the regions in each area.  Because factors important in one area may be unimportant for
distinguishing  regions in other areas,  we believe that  an "across-the-board"  weighted overlay
approach  largely inhibits the ability to distinguish and make use of the  most regionally  prominent
features. For example, a map of lake total phosphorus regions was recently completed for the Upper
Midwest (Omernik et al. 1988).  The map was compiled using multiple data sets and maps of factors
believed to affect differences in lake phosphorus concentration. Delineation of the regions was based
on  patterns of the actual  phosphorus values  and their  apparent associations with  the other
environmental  factors.   In some  regions, phosphorus patterns appeared  to be associated with
Quaternary geology, whereas in others, soil type and vegetation cover, or some other combination of
environmental  characteristics, appeared to correlate better with phosphorus.

Examples

    Certain regional frameworks have been widely used for a variety of resource management evalu-
ations, including purposes for which they are poorly suited. There is nothing inherently improper
in using an  existing framework for resource inventory and management, but its utility should be
evaluated relative  to the availability of another framework,  or the need to develop a framework for
                                             xv

-------
the specific purpose. Some frameworks reflect a narrow thematic focus.  Maps depicting hydrologic
units and physiographic regions are two of the more popular examples.

    a.  Hydrologic units are necessary for tracking the contributions of base streamflow and surface
        runoff  to  total streamflow  and constituent  loadings.   They have  also been used as
        cataloguing units to report water quality, with misleading results.  Often, water quality in
        the headwaters of a unit is significantly different from water quality downstream because
        landscape features affecting water quality change dramatically.  A regional framework that
        accounts for environmental factors affecting water quality would provide more rational
        accounting units.

    b.  Physiographic regions  based strictly on land-surface form or physiography reflect the
        spatial  patterns of some environmental variables  for  some  parts of  the country;  but
        physiographic regions are not useful for understanding patterns in resource quality within
        large expanses of relatively homogeneous land surface types, such as in extensive plains or
        deserts.

Other frameworks have been compiled  to depict regions based on  a more general thematic focus,
reflecting several environmental attributes. Three examples are Land Resource Regions and Major
Land Resource Areas of the United States, Ecoregions of the United States, and  Ecoregions of the
Conterminous United States.

    a.  Land Resource Regions and Major Land Resource Areas of the United States was originally
        compiled by Morris E. Austin (1972). Depicting two levels of regional hierarchy, the map
        was intended to provide a geographic basis for management of  agricultural concerns.  Two
        factors affect the utility of the map:  (1) individual states and groups of states, working
        independently with little or no quality control for consistency in delineation, compiled the
        map, and  (2) delineation was  largely based on information from soil  maps of variable
        quality.

    b.  Ecoregions of the United States was compiled by Robert G. Bailey (1976).  Depicting
        several hierarchical levels of regions, the map was developed for resources managed by the
        U.S. Forest Service.  The delineation of regional boundaries was based primarily on a single
        environmental variable at each level of the hierarchy. Difficulty in using  the map can result
        because the particular variable represented at each hierarchical level may not be consistently
        useful in determining resource conditions from one area to the next.

    c.  Ecoregions of the Conterminous United States was compiled by James M. Omernik (1987a).
        The map was developed to classify streams for water resource  management and was based
                                             xvi

-------
        on the premise that regional patterns of combinations of environmental factors would be
        reflected  in regional patterns in surface water quality.  The map depicts one level of
        regional hierarchy. Regional boundaries were derived by examining the spatial distributions
        of a number of mapped environmental factors, most notably, but not limited to, land-
        surface form, potential natural vegetation, soils, and land use. The single hierarchical level
        depicted on the map may not provide the level of resolution required  by many resource
        managers in many states, although additional levels of hierarchy have since been developed.
        Also, because the regions were delineated by considering the general effects of terrestrial
        and climatic characteristics  on surface water quality,  the map may not be appropriate for
        some terrestrial assessments.

THE PROCESS  OF REGIONAL DELINEATION

    The method of regionalization employed at the U.S. EPA  Environmental Research Laboratory
in Corvallis, Oregon, has not  only been used to delineate Ecoregions of the Conterminous United
States, but also  broader theme, lower resolution regions, for national-level management concerns
and specific, higher resolution ecological subregions,  for  state-level management concerns.  An
example of a project addressing the latter is included in this report (Subsection 2.4.2). The following
steps outline the general process for  regionalization:

    a.  Define  the scope of the project, set reasonable priorities, and decide on outputs (products).
        These important decisions place bounds on the types of reference material gathered, the
        environmental features examined, the level of resolution, and the geographic extent of the
        effort.

    b.  Collect reference  maps, narrative descriptions, and  data  concerning the environmental
        factors  relating to the regionalization objectives.

    c.  Identify the environmental  characteristics predominating over an area and tabulate these
        characteristics  to define prospective regions.  Some regions will have a specific set of
        features; others will consist of a mosaic of characteristics too small to be  separated at the
        selected resolution.

    d.  Outline the regional boundaries by circumscribing the mapped sets of characteristics tabu-
        lated in step c. Areas of uncertainty will occur where two  regions abut and the landscape
        contains characteristics common to both. Expert judgment is required for delineating these
        transitional zones.
                                            xvn

-------
    e.  Generate a final map and regional descriptions.

    f.  Evaluate the regions using other data.

EVALUATION OF REGIONAL FRAMEWORKS

    The value of an ecoregional framework lies in its utility in accounting for spatial variability in
environmental resources.  If variation  within regions is  as high as variation among regions, the
framework is of little use.  Thus, ecoregions have been evaluated through comparisons with spatial
patterns in environmental  data to assess the extent to which the regions accounted for the spatial
variability of different variables. Our assessments were conducted in and with five states interested
in evaluating and using our ecoregion framework.

Options for Evaluating  Environmental Patterns

    One option for evaluating regional patterns is to design and execute a sampling program tailored
to the regions and variables of interest.  Designing a sampling network with the specific intent of
evaluating or characterizing regions has many advantages including:

    •   Control of geographic distribution of sites to insure broad spatial coverage and regional
        representativeness.

    •   Control of the timing of sampling to  assess critical times of the year for a synoptic survey,
        or  of the monitoring frequency for longer term coverage.

    •   Selection of variables of interest, either univariate for the development of specific theme
        maps,  or multivariate, including water chemistry,  physical  structure,  and biological
        variables.

    •   Assurance of completeness so that all variables are measured at the desired locations with
         the desired frequencies; data gaps cause problems when multivariate procedures are used.

    •   Specification of data quality objectives and quality assurance/quality control procedures
         so  that data of known quality are obtained.

    Another approach is to use existing data  available from a  variety of sources.  Use of available
data offers  several potential advantages:
                                             XVlll

-------
    •    Large numbers of sites and samples
    •    Historical perspective
    •    Great diversity of variables
    •    Relatively low costs (access to database and analysts' time)
    •    Short turnaround time between research design and execution of analyses

However there are also serious limitations to consider:

    •    Site mislocations and miscodings can be extensive.
    •    Data quality may be lacking or unknown.
    •    Distribution of sites may be inadequate.
    «    Sampling and analytical procedures may differ among data sets because different agencies
         collect, analyze, and report data for different reasons, at different times, using different
         methods and reporting  units.
    •    Sites may lack complete sets of variables.

For example, in a project designed for the study of stream water quality in Colorado (detailed in
Subection 3.6.1), we acquired existing data from some 5,000 stream sites in Colorado, but were only
able to use 1% to 20% of the sites in our various analyses.

Analysis Techniques

    Regardless of the data acquisition method, there  are  many  useful analysis techniques for
evaluating regional patterns. Emphasis is on presenting a picture of the spatial patterns and includes
the use of:

    •    Color-coded dot maps to display spatial patterns in  individual variables
    •    Box plots, by region, to display central tendency and variation
    •    Ordinations of chemical and physical habitat data and biological assemblages
    •    Indices that synthesize ecologically relevant information into a single number
    •    Regional species profiles

    Statewide  ecoregion  evaluations  (discussed in Sections 3 and  4)  demonstrate patterns in
biological, chemical, and physical variables corresponding to the regions in Arkansas,  Colorado,
Minnesota, Ohio, and Oregon. These studies used available data and data collected specifically for
evaluation of the regions.
                                             xix

-------
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS AND FUTURE DIRECTIONS

    The synoptic approach described in this report can be used to evaluate the extent and complexity
of environmental issues and the benefits of applying regional analytical techniques. A number of
themes currently of interest are described below. Because the combination of terrestrial and climatic
information used to develop Omernik's ecoregion map is pertinent to several of the issues, the map
may be useful as an upper-level framework.

    a.  Cumulative Impact Assessment on Water Bodies.  The extent of effects on surface water
        quality from waterway  modification, waste disposal,  and terrestrial devegetation is
        essentially unknown. A regional framework can be used to organize and analyze environ-
        mental data to assess the cumulative effects of these management practices. Three types of
        assessments could be considered:  attainable quality, current status, and best  management
        practices.

     b.  Nonpoint Source Pollution. Evaluation of nonpoint source pollution on surface waters is
        closely related to the study of cumulative impacts.  Effects on surface water  quality from
        modification  of water courses, irrigation return flow, terrestrial devegetation, stockyard
        manure dispersal, and chemical agents can be sorted through regional analysis of represen-
        tative surface waters.  A regional framework can be used to organize and analyze environ-
        mental data to assess the isolated and combined effects of various management practices.

     c.  Soil Erosion.  Our  agricultural soils are threatened by long-term loss of fertility from
        erosion due to management practices related to farming, timber harvest, livestock grazing,
        and urban and rural development.  Soil type, slope gradient, slope aspect, potential areas
        of mass soil movement,  and water courses can be  mapped and compared with  irrigation
        patterns and intensity, tilling practices, forest and range vegetation condition, and rates of
        soil erosion. Such information can be used to determine best tilling practices, timber harvest
        locations and levels, timing  and intensity of grazing allotments, and best  locations  and
        associated practices to minimize impacts from construction.

     d.  Endangered Species.  Risks to threatened, endangered, keystone, and game  species from
        pesticides can be evaluated by examining maps of known and potential habitats  of the
        species of concern in concert with maps of pesticide application patterns. Potential pesticide
        dispersion can be  estimated  by geographic assessment of  drainage  patterns and  soil
        characteristics.  Acute direct effects and chronic indirect effects on species of concern can
        be assessed by field studies of areas expected  to  differ in impact.   Potential areas for
        introduction or restoration of game or endangered species can be evaluated for  suspected
        pesticide stress.
                                             xx

-------
e.   Biological  Diversity.  Local  and regional patterns  in environmental  variables affect
    biodiversity and the impact of human actions on diversity.  Habitat types or regions that
    are particularly rich in species, have great abundances of individuals, or support unusual
    communities with  high  rates of endemism can  be  mapped.    Regional analysis  of
    biogeographic and habitat data can be compared with species distributional patterns and
    abundance so that,  where habitat conditions are desirable,  managers can seek to  increase
    those conditions on a regional scale; where conditions are undesirable, managers can attempt
    to reverse  those trends, protect critical remnant ecosystems in the region,  or expand or
    reconfigure refugia before species  become  threatened  or endangered.   Environmental
    characteristics  common  among habitats  or  regions  can  be used to develop  resource
    management policies that are more protective of biodiversity.

f.   Groundwater Assessment and Protection. Groundwater aquifers may become contaminated
    by nonpoint sources of pesticides and fertilizers, naturally occurring chemicals, and point
    source toxics. Natural features, anthropogenic contributions, and human consumption can
    be spatially assessed to predict the  relative  risk of contamination of groundwater with
    respect to drinking water and wellhead protection.  Another related concern is hazardous
    waste siting and assessment. Proximity of proposed and existing sites to human settlements,
    ranges and migratory pathways of species of interest, surface drainage patterns, and surface
    waters and wetlands can be incorporated into the regional analysis.

g.  Global Climate Change.  The effects of global climate change on crop production, human
    welfare, and biota may be  predicted from regional geographic  analyses.  An analysis of
    current soils, potential natural vegetation types, land-surface forms, and climates has led
    to the  delineation of Omernik's (1987a) ecoregions.   Current species ranges, human
    population centers, and patterns of crops, forage, and forests can be analyzed  in comparison
    with ecoregions to document present distribution. Quantitative variable response models can
    be developed to predict the distribution of variables  under different scenarios.  The
    reduction or increase in the predicted range of a particular  species under various scenarios
    offers a quantification of the possible changes.  Projected climates and predicted species
    ranges can be mapped to  study the shift of the less stable variables over the  more constant
    environmental characteristics.
                                         xxi

-------

-------
                                        SECTION 1

                               THE CONCEPT OF REGIONS

1.1  INTRODUCTION

       All of us are familiar with different kinds of regions at different levels of resolution.  We
recognize political  regions,  perceiving the  world as a  hierarchical  set  of units:   continents
comprising countries comprising states, counties, cities, districts, and neighborhoods. We recognize
cultural regions.  We identify people by their appearance, mannerisms, and speech patterns.  We
can often tell if they hail from one part  of the United States or another, or if they come from
our home state or city,  uptown or downtown.
       In a more formal sense, a region  is associated with a specific location that covers some
extent of area and contains a certain  degree of homogeneity with respect to the characteristics
used to define  it (deBlij 1978).   Wiken (1986) explained that, "Regionalization is a method of
reducing or eliminating  details which do not, on the average, hold true  over large areas," and Hart
(1982) stated:

       A region is a more or less homogeneous area that differs from other areas. To use
       a more  contemporary jargon, within-region variance  is less than between-region
       variance.   The  best regions are those that are  based on the greatest amount  of
       interrelatedness.
Hart further noted that the concept of region is a useful intellectual device for organizing and
presenting information and promoting communication.
       A type  of region commonly  used  in  describing  surroundings  and  conditions  is the
environmental region.  We speak  of the banana belt, the coniferous forest zone, and the Great
Plains.   We examine world biomes, the ecosystems within them, and the  smaller habitat types
within the ecosystems.  The process for delineating environmental regions continues to evolve.
The term ecoregion, originally coined  by Crowley (1967) and first carried to mapped form as a
classification of ecological regions of  the United States by Bailey (1976), has become generally
accepted  to mean  a region  of relative homogeneity  in ecological  systems  or  in  relationships
between organisms and their environments (Omernik 1987a). However, efforts to delineate natural
ecological regions for the  United States date back to the early part of the twentieth century (Joerg
1914), in response to a general interest in studying distributions of environmental phenomena
(Herbertson 1905).
       In many environmental resource agencies, interest today centers on environmental regions
and research and  applications pertaining to ecosystem management.   Recent legislation  (Clean
Water Act, Public  Law 92-500,  18 Oct. 1972 and numerous amendments; National Environmental

-------
Policy Act, Public  Law  91-190, 1 Jan.  1970 and several amendments)  requires that reports be
submitted to Congress on the condition of national resources, prompting agencies to explore more
effective ways of reviewing, managing,  and reporting on resource concerns through recognition
of  the  environmental components  most  affecting, or  affected  by, those  concerns.   Many
government agencies have already developed  regional management structures to  address these
needs, but others remain bound to political boundaries as  management units.   We  believe that
frameworks that divide or classify natural resources into relatively homogeneous units (regions)
can provide a tool to accelerate and improve the processes  of resource assessment, management,
and reporting.

1.2  PURPOSE AND SCOPE

       The purpose of this report is to explain the concept and nature of regions and the utility
of a regional framework for  resource management.  In particular, this report includes discussions
on (1) the  nature of regions  and boundaries, (2) some of the more popular regional frameworks,
their attributes, and their limitations,  (3) the synoptic regionalization approach developed at the
U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory in Corvallis, Oregon, and examples of surface water
projects  where the approach was applied, (4) the process  of selecting regionally  representative
reference sites, (5) methods  of  analyzing data from such sites for extrapolating results to larger
areas, (6) ways in which an  ecoregional framework has been applied toward state  and national
level assessments of resource quality, for example, to establish physical, chemical,  and biological
resource criteria in accord with regional capacities for buffering environmental  changes, and (7)
other possible areas of  research and  management that might benefit from regional assessment
techniques.
       Discussions in the report are divided into four main sections.  Section 1  covers some major
components of regional  representation,  including resolution, thematic specificity,  and boundary
accuracy  (Section  1.3);  utility  of frameworks for  selection of regional  reference sites (1.4);
principal factors contributing to  the delineation process, mainly relating to reference materials
used  and approaches taken  in delineation (1.5); and examples  of popular regional frameworks,
their attributes, and  their limitations (1.6).  Section 2 introduces the approach used by the U.S.
EPA Environmental Research Laboratory in Corvallis, Oregon, to develop environmental regional
frameworks for research and management, including the circumstances behind  the development
of the approach (2.2), the methods developed (2.3), and specific  examples using the methods (2.4).
Section 3 presents methods for  evaluating correspondence between regions and  patterns in other
environmental data and incorporates discussion on data sources (3.2); data needs, such as type,
quality, and quantity (3.3); regional sampling options (3.4);  and  methods of regional data analysis
(3.5 and 3.6).  Section  4  relates  the  applicability of regional  analysis  for addressing state  and
national management mandates related to water quality standards (4.2) and water body monitoring,
assessment, and reporting (4.3), and briefly describes additional fields of potential application of
a regional approach (4.4).

-------
       Throughout this report, we use figures and tables from specific projects relating to regional
assessment of resources.   Three maps (plates) pertaining  to  descriptions of a recent study of
environmental regions in Colorado are located in an envelope inside the back cover. In the front part
of the report, we include a list defining our usage of terminology in an attempt to reduce ambiguity
resulting from interpretations unique to different disciplines.  Because of their prevalence throughout
this document, four terms are defined in the following paragraph.
       To impose some consistency in the terms used to describe regionalization, we have divided
the process into four main phases.  The act of initially tabulating (listing) the major environmental
features of potential regions is termed defining regions.  Physically drawing the regional boundaries
is  termed delineation.  Following delineation,  a final map is drawn to depict, or show, the regions.
To complete the process, regional descriptions are composed to characterize the regions in more detail
than the initial tabular listings.

1.3 FACTORS AFFECTING REGIONAL REPRESENTATION

       Before discussing regionalization, we should  mention several  aspects of mapped  regional
frameworks that affect their suitability for use in resource assessment.  These include their level of
resolution, degree of thematic specificity, and precision of regional boundaries  and descriptions.
The level of resolution shown on a map relates to the level of detail incorporated, or the ability to
distinguish patterns at various scales and for various purposes.  Thus  the resolution affects the
suitability of the map, or framework, for different uses.  For instance, in planning and  carrying out
a successful automobile trip across the United States, several levels of resolution are needed:  a small-
scale road atlas to help determine the general course of the trip, larger scale state maps to determine
the best routes to  travel, and even  larger scale street  maps to locate specific streets and addresses.
To attempt the trip relying solely on the resolution portrayed on one map would be inappropriate.
The route is more easily and accurately located when  the amount of detail portrayed is appropriate
to the need.
       In the  context of  resource assessment, frameworks of different resolution suit  different
management concerns and increase the efficiency and accuracy of evaluations.  At a national level,
it may be effective to  examine environmental patterns  from a more distant, general  perspective,
comparable to studying patterns on the earth from an altitude of about 30 km above ground.  For
refinement of these patterns, such as in examining  a single- or multi-state area, increasing the
resolution to patterns discernable at 10 km (a common cruising altitude of commercial jets) above the
ground might be useful. If the patterns must  be further sorted, information of a  greater resolution
may be obtained by viewing the earth's resources from closer distances, or even from the ground.
Appropriate resolution is thus dictated by the goals of regionalization: broad-scale regions for coarse
level needs, and finer scale regions for more detailed needs.

-------
       Another aspect  of regional frameworks is their inherent  degree  of thematic  specificity.
Some regional themes are broad-based and appropriate for a large variety of uses; others are very
specific and have a much narrower range of utility.  The military uses general purpose regions,
for example, to analyze broad-scale operation scenarios  for entire countries.  Military geographers
define broad regions within which combinations of conditions such as climate, topography, soils,
and vegetation are similar. Information on a variety of geographic phenomena, predominantly in
mapped  form, is used to determine  these  regions.   For  specific needs, such  as determining
suitability  for air landings or  concealment of troops, more specific information about  local
topography,  surface  material,  and  vegetation  type  and density  is used and the resulting
classification framework has narrower applications.
       In environmental studies, regions may represent broad similarities in ecosystem components
(e.g.,  Bailey 1976; Herbertson 1905; Joerg 1914; Omernik 1987a; Udvardy 1975; Wiken 1986), or
they  may be  designed  to  address more specific themes, such as vegetation types, land-surface
forms, soil nutrient concentrations, or hardness of surface waters.  The regions based  on broader
themes can be used for a variety of terrestrial and aquatic surveys and inventories; those based
on narrower themes are useful for studying how the distribution of the single feature affects, or
is affected by, other environmental characteristics.  Because the management of  water resources
often concerns a  variety of environmental attributes and issues, maps of broader thematic regions
are of greater utility for  such  purposes; they correlate with  a  wider variety of environmental
characteristics.
       A third aspect of regional frameworks is that regional  boundaries and descriptions are not
discrete.    Regional  boundaries  represent  zones  of   transition  on  the  ground,  where  the
characteristics of one relatively homogeneous  area blend with those of another.   The transition
width of some boundaries is very narrow and recognizable from the  ground; for others, it is less
distinct and can best be distinguished from a distance.   A person riding  in an automobile across
one of these fuzzier boundaries would not be  able to tell when  the  boundary had been crossed.
However, to a person whose eyes were closed  50 km before crossing the line and opened  50 km
beyond, the regional differences would be noticeable.
       It is also  important to recognize  that regional boundaries cannot be reliably  transferred
from  a small  map scale to one of larger scale using mechanical  means (i.e., following political
borders or geographic  reference points common to  both maps).  For example,  if the national
(1:7,500,000) ecoregion  map (Omernik 1987a) is enlarged to the scale of a U.S. Geological Survey
topographic map (1:250,000),  the resulting boundaries  will appear on the order  of 8 km wide.
Because it is not  acceptable to work with such  a wide line on  the topographic map, we refine the
line using higher resolution reference maps similar in content  to those used to define the  initial,
smaller scale ecoregion  boundaries.  Thus, the  appropriate way to transfer lines to maps of other
scales is not through mechanical means, but through examination of maps of appropriate resolution
in detail with respect to environmental characteristics discernable at the  new map scale.

-------
       Just as variation in environmental features  limits the precision  of regional  boundaries,
variability of features within  regions  limits  the  precision  of  regional  descriptions.    The
descriptions represent the  characteristics typifying each region, but it is  inappropriate to assume
that all areas within a region possess all typifying characteristics.  As Wiken (1986) reminded us,
there are  regional details that  generally  do not  hold  true  over large areas.   Still,  regional
descriptions  help in conceptualizing the representative  qualities as a  basis for recognizing  a
region's distinction from surrounding areas.

1.4    REGIONAL REFERENCE SITES

       One of the benefits of a regional framework  is its use in selecting regional reference sites.
Since a framework provides boundaries around  areas within which environmental conditions are
relatively homogeneous compared with other areas, sites comprised of  these conditions can be
used as references for other, environmentally similar sites. An essential  component of reference
site  selection is  its  representativeness in a  region; it is  feasible to map the extent of similar
conditions to specify the areas within which  reference  sites  can be selected and  over which
reference site information  is expected to apply. General guidelines for selecting regional reference
sites are:
       a.      Identify the objectives and the combination of environmental characteristics that
               most pertain to the objectives.

       b.      Map areas where these combinations occur and select  sites within these areas.

       d.      Eliminate sites that are physically or legally inaccessible.

       e.      Check the accuracy of mapped information using current aerial photographs, site
               visits, and local expert opinion to eliminate sites not meeting selection criteria.

       f.      Collect data from remaining sites for analysis.

       It will be necessary to modify  or expand  these  guidelines for individual  purposes. For
example, if the  objective  is to measure  regionally attainable stream quality,  the  above process
would be somewhat modified.  For this example, it is  assumed that  attainable quality can be
approximated  by  measuring  physical,  chemical,  and   biological  quality  of  streams  draining
watersheds  that are representative of the natural environmental characteristics typifying the region
and subject to the least possible amount  of human influence.  Thus the following steps apply:

-------
       a.     Of the characteristics typifying the region, specify those that have an effect on
              water  quality, such as regional soil type,  vegetation cover, amounts and intensity
              of annual or seasonal precipitation, gradient of land-surface forms, and occurrence
              of natural geologic deposits.

       b.     Map areas that  share a similar combination of characteristics.

       c.     Select  watersheds from within those areas.
       d.     Eliminate watersheds where access is prohibited.

       e.     Eliminate watersheds  affected by human  influence.  If there is  an insufficient
              number remaining, add watersheds subject to the least amount of influence.  The
              resulting set of sites will rarely contain any pristine watersheds.  However, given
              current regional land  use  practices, this  collection of watersheds  should yield
              information on what is reasonably achievable within that region.  In some regions,
              all watersheds are subject to moderate to severe use impact.   Thus,  sites that are
              moderately disturbed are the closest available approximation to natural conditions.
              For example, in a  region used  extensively  for farming,  the  least  impacted,
              environmentally representative watersheds might be those having thin, discontinuous
              strips of natural riparian vegetation  along  unchannelized stream reaches.

       f.     Perform field checking for site suitability  before sampling  to  insure the accuracy
              of mapped information and to eliminate inappropriate watersheds.  Current low-
              altitude aerial photographs and local expert opinion may be used as initial screening
              methods; site visits are essential.

       g.     Collect physical, chemical,  and biological data from the sites remaining on  the list
              to generate the reference data that define the range of regionally achievable  quality
              against which the quality of other sites can be  compared.

       An important reason for identifying regions  is that information from areas within a region
can be extrapolated to other parts  of  the  region (e.g., water chemistry measurements of within-
region reference streams being used to infer stream water chemistry throughout the region). Thus,
a major  assumption is that  the drainage area of the streams being measured exhibits  the same
characteristics as the drainage areas for which water quality is being inferred. The value of the
extrapolation hinges on careful selection of representative sites.

-------
1.5  FACTORS AFFECTING THE DELINEATION OF REGIONS

       The concept of  regions  has developed  because  of our need to  study,  describe, and '
communicate spatial information.  Delineation translates  the  concept of regions  into a tangible
result, or  map.   The  outcome  of the  regionalization  process  is  not only  affected  by  the
management or research  objectives, but also by the origin,  quantity,  and quality of  references used
to delineate regions. References may include maps, numerical data, or interpretive text. Because
we  primarily use maps in delineating regions, this discussion  focuses mainly on maps.

1.5.1  Origin of Regional Reference Maps

       Some regional frameworks have very narrow objectives  (specific themes) and are commonly
delineated using single  sources  of  data.  Precipitation maps, for  example,  rely on rain  gauge
measurements from scattered weather stations. Point data are interpolated to project continuous
categories  of precipitation over the  landscape.  Physiographic maps are derived from photo or
satellite  imagery.   Map  units generally require  less interpolation than  point  data,  but remote
imagery can   be  difficult  to   interpret because diurnal, seasonal,  and  annual changes  in
environmental  conditions  greatly  vary  the  appearance  of  land characteristics  on  imagery.
Dependency on a single reference source can lead to gross misinterpretation where insufficient
coverage or quality of information occurs.
       In  cases where few data are available for  the variable of interest, regions are sometimes
classified using a surrogate variable known to be related to the variable of interest.  For example,
regions depicting the sensitivity of surface waters to acidification have sometimes  been delineated
by  classifying  a soil or  rock type, based on  known relationships between that  characteristic and
surface  water  sensitivity  (Environment Canada  1987;  Hendrey  et  al.  1980;   McFee  1980).
Interpretation of surrogate variables is complicated by potential problems with quality and quantity
of  data, and by the fact that the relationship between the two  variables may not be consistent
across the country due  to the effects of other environmental factors.
        Some regions  are delineated based on synthesis of a number  of mapped environmental
variables;  there are several benefits to  this  method of regionalization.  Because environmental
characteristics  are  interrelated  (e.g.,  climate and surficial geology affect  soil  formation;  soil
formation and climate affect vegetation type, which further affects soil formation;  all  of these
factors affect land use,  and land use affects  vegetation succession  and  soils), spatial distributions
of  many of the features coincide, reinforcing patterns that would not be entirely identifiable from
any single variable.  The mapped distributions of each can be compared to gauge their relative
validity.  Where distributions in all but one mapped factor tend  to follow  similar patterns and
appear to  explain the distribution and/or quality of a variable of interest, the reliability  of  the
aberrant factor can be questioned. For example, a particular soil type may well be associated with
differences in the condition of  a particular  variable, but the map  of soil type distributions may

-------
be  of poor quality or the classification  used may be inappropriate for revealing the spatial
relationship with  the variable.   Thus, the usefulness of a  complementary set of  references
compensates for the potential problems in quality encountered from a single data source.

1.5.2  Quality and Resolution of Reference Maps

       Variation in the quality of maps used in regional assessment has a considerable bearing on
the relative accuracy or utility of the resulting regions, so screening is necessary for all types of
regional assessment.  The accuracy of base data, the manner in which the data are evaluated and
interpolations  made, and  the appropriateness of the classification scheme to  the purposes of the
regional  assessment all affect the quality of  the  regional classification.  Reference  maps are
derived from  a variety  of sources.  The accuracy of some maps is  substantiated by ground-
truthing, but  this is  not  often the case.  Some maps are derived primarily from  analysis and
interpretation  of numerical data (e.g., climatological isoline maps), some from interpretation of
aerial imagery (e.g., land-surface form  and land use maps), some from historic information (e.g.,
maps  of natural vegetation and species ranges), and  some from existing maps  (e.g., environmental
regions). Many maps are the product of a combination of sources (e.g., maps of potential natural
vegetation, typically  assembled from historic  accounts, imagery of present distribution, and an
array  of maps, including  those  showing existing  climate,  soils,  and  landforms).   If several
reference maps are being used for delineating regions and  one of the  maps has  been closely
derived from another, then the most recent map does not really depict additional  information, but
somewhat duplicates its predecessor. Soils maps, for instance, are often assembled from relatively
few data points and inferred  associations  with mapped vegetation and physiographic features.
       The method of evaluation and compilation of numerical, mapped, or interpretive data
varies not only from map to map, but within each map as well. Where data are faulty or lacking,
or  where  inappropriate  cartographic  techniques  have  been used,  the  distribution of  an
environmental variable on one map may bear no resemblance  to  the  distributions  of related
variables on others.  Also, if different portions of a map have been compiled  by a number of
persons working independently, there  are likely to be problems with the consistency of detail
presented and interpretation methods followed.  These are good reasons  for  using a complement
of maps to aid in regionalization.  If one map fails to display suspected distributional patterns for
an  area,  other maps of related characteristics  may  display distributions from which to infer the
appropriate patterns.
       A major consideration in  evaluating references is how pertinent  they are to the regional
assessment  goals.    Some references  have  misleading  qualities  that adversely  affect the
regionalization process.   For  instance, remote sensing  imagery  is often used  for delineating
regional patterns of environmental resources. Yet, because of spatial, diurnal,  seasonal, and multi-
year variation in environmental conditions, the imagery appearance of specific characteristics such
as vegetation, soils, and land use  varies.   Maps of  environmental characteristics should be used

-------
to complement remote sensing imagery, and extensive field verification of the study area is often
required to avoid misinterpretation of patterns.
       In some cases, the name of a reference map is misinterpreted to imply a theme wider than
the framework designers intended. A map of hydrologic units (U.S. Geological Survey 1982a), for
example, is assumed by many map users to imply units that relate to surface water quality and, at
the very least, to topographic drainages. In actuality, hydrologic units are management cataloguing
units that are based somewhat on surface hydrologic basins,  but correspond poorly, if at all, to
patterns of factors that cause spatial  differences in the quality and quantity of surface waters.  To
evaluate the utility of these and other reference maps, it is important to understand the meaning of
the map units.
       Resolution of detail on the reference maps affects the level to which regions can be defined
and delineated; regions cannot be delineated in greater detail than that provided on the reference
maps.  Map scale should not be confused with level of detail portrayed.  Maps of two different
characteristics compiled at the  same scale are  likely to reflect different levels  of detail  or
generalization. For that reason, it is not necessary for reference maps to be at a uniform scale to be
useful for interpreting  and delineating  regions.   Differences in resolution must  be  mentally
accommodated for when patterns are compared from map to map.
       There are a few ways to determine  the level of resolution represented on a map.  The amount
of irregularity or apparent detail in the map unit boundaries is not necessarily indicative of the level
of information represented.  Comparisons  between a particular reference map and several others at
the same or a larger map scale can provide  some indication of the relative degree of detail portrayed.
Accompanying text  may describe the compilation sources and methods. Boundaries  around map
classes  having a stairstep or sawtooth appearance indicate  the  map has  been  compiled from
information at the  resolution of  a single  step, or cell.  The  cells  may represent a summation of
information from larger scale maps  or remote imagery, or may result from the coarse resolution
capacity of computer hardware or software.

1.5.3  Approaches to Delineating  Regions
       One way to categorize delineation methods is to distinguish quantitative from qualitative
compilation methods.  By quantitative, we mean employing a statistical framework for selecting,
analyzing, and classifying data to form regions.  This implies that all reference data must be handled
in a predetermined, systematic way, and normalized for analyses.  By qualitative, we mean expert
judgment applied throughout the selection, analysis, and classification of data to form regions, basing
judgments on the quantity and quality of reference data and on interpretation of the relationships
between the data and other environmental factors.
       On first consideration, a quantitative approach seems a straightforward, replicative method
for planning, programming, and documenting regional analysis. Still, there is variability in results
simply because of the variety of ways that data can be manipulated, depending upon the judgment

-------
of the analyst, and because quantitative tools are poorly developed for incorporating the multivariate
judgments involved in delineating regions. Evaluations are continually needed to filter out variations
in quality and quantity of reference information for different areas and different associations
between  environmental variables.   Furthermore, regional changes  often  occur at geographic
boundaries not explicitly detected by point sampling and interpolation schemes.
      Quantitative methods appear most appropriate for addressing specific regional themes for
which spatial coverage of source data is  good, but  even in seemingly straightforward cases,
qualitative decisions are necessary. For example, precipitation maps, depicting areas within which
a particular amount of annual rainfall and/or snowfall can be expected, are based on mathematical
interpolation of measurements taken at numerous weather stations over a period of years. Qualitative
judgments are needed to amend interpolations and account for the effects of local terrestrial features
on weather  circulation  patterns for areas where data are lacking.  When quantitative methods are
strictly adhered to, interpretation of data can result in improper regional inferences. Omernik et al.
(1988) describe a  scenario in  which a nutrient-rich,  agricultural lake  plain, containing few lakes
(none with data), is bordered on three sides by forested areas of pitted glacial outwash and moraine
containing many lakes of low phosphorus concentration.  Quantitative techniques would  probably
overlook the agricultural lake plain, including it in the class of phosphorus values assigned to the
surrounding forests, a class whose values would probably be much lower than those expected for the
lake plain.
      The strength of a qualitative approach is that all available data, including spatial patterns of
the variable itself, maps of characteristics that cause or reflect regional variations in the quality of
the variable, and  expertise of local  and regional  managers and scientists, can be incorporated to
define and  delineate regions.  References that are meaningful for  explaining the distribution or
quality of a variable in  one location may not be helpful in another because of interactions  with still
other environmental factors;  with a qualitative approach,  reference sources can be  applied or
discarded based on their applicability to developing an understanding of the spatial distribution of
the variable. For  example, gradient and watershed size may be the most important environmental
factors influencing stream water quality in a steep mountainous region, but less important than the
effects from soil erosion and  farm chemical runoff in a downstream,  flat, agricultural region.  A
qualitative approach encourages selection of the most appropriate array of references  to assess
patterns region by region. The drawback of a qualitative approach is that two different investigators
are not likely  to  arrive at  identical  regional boundaries.  However,  it is also unlikely  that two
independent investigators would delineate the same set of boundaries from a quantitative  approach
because of the qualitative judgments necessarily involved, such as choosing which reference data,
weightings,  and classification techniques to use.
      Using a qualitative approach, it will become apparent which mapped environmental features
most relate to variables of interest, and to what extent. A recent study illustrating this point is a map
of lake total phosphorus regions  for the Upper  Midwest (Omernik et al.  1988).  The  map was
developed for lake management with  particular regard to eutrophication. This phosphorus map was
                                              10

-------
compiled using multiple data sets, screened for comparability, and all available maps of factors
believed to affect differences in lake phosphorus concentration, including Quaternary and bedrock
geology, soils, existing and potential natural vegetation, land use, and physiography.  The regions
were delineated based on patterns of the actual phosphorus values and their apparent associations
with the other factors.
      Some researchers suggest that a weighted overlay method represents a middle ground between
quantitative and qualitative methodology. Such a method requires that environmental characteristics
be ranked in importance over a definable area so that the rest of the delineation process remains
more objective and replicative.  If this could be accomplished, regionalization procedures could be
carried out using computerized  geographic information systems.  We remain unconvinced of this
possibility for a number of reasons:

      a.    The relative importance of particular environmental characteristics for influencing the
            areal definition of a particular region commonly varies throughout the region.

      b.    Even if the relative  importance of the environmental characteristics remained constant
            across a region, the quality of information portrayed on the reference maps used for
            establishing the areal extent of the region often varies significantly, requiring continual
            modification of delineation techniques. The reasons for this variation in quality result
            from the different source materials and base maps used to compile individual reference
            maps.  Thus, the level of data generalization not only varies among different maps of
            the same scale, but within an individual map as well. This affects the accurate portrayal
            of information relative to its true geographic location, so it is necessary to manually
            adjust the placement of regional boundaries so as to avoid the "slivering" that would
            result from mechanically overlaying a set of maps.

      c.    Because of the inconsistencies mentioned in the previous two points, there is no way
            to pre-assess  the  decisions  that  will  be  required  to draw  regional boundaries.
            Preassessment is necessary for designing regionalization computer software.

      d.    The above  reasons aside, the amount  of  computer storage  space required for all the
            digital information comprising the reference maps would be prohibitive.

      We feel it is  necessary to actually complete the process of drawing regional boundaries in
order to know what decisions will be required for creating comprehensive computer software capable
of performing regional delineation.  We also believe that the number of discussions and judgments
involved in synoptic regionalization preclude the design of a computer program able to account for
even  a small portion  of the possibilities that  might occur.   Attempting this would  increase the
                                             11

-------
difficulties of the regionalization process manyfold.  Computer technology is much too primitive
for this type of analysis.

1.6 EXAMPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL REGIONS

1.6.1  Maps Depicting Specific Environmental Characteristics

      A number of maps depicting environmental regions have been developed as a result of interest
in a particular resource  or issue.  Maps showing regions of geology, land-surface form, soils,
vegetation, land use, physiography, hydrologic drainage areas, lake phosphorus concentrations, and
sensitivity of surface waters to acidic deposition are several examples. These  maps are useful for a
variety of assessments, assuming the map units have been compiled in a manner appropriate for the
intended use. The units represent areas within which certain classes or types of environmental
characteristics are expected to predominate.  Certain of these maps have  been  widely used as
frameworks for  resource  investigation, management, and reporting.  Because  the frameworks were
published and available, had map units useful for explaining some patterns  of environmental
phenomena in some parts of the country, or had framework titles relating to  a particular resource,
they were  applied to a number of uses, some for which  they were neither intended nor suited;
hydrologic units and physiographic regions are two examples.
      The  hydrologic unit framework of the U.S. Geological Survey (1982a,  1984) is probably the
most widely used of the regional frameworks.  Though not exactly the same as basins, hydrologic
units  are similar, in that their boundaries are  often  based  on topographic  drainage divides.  A
number of water resource management activities, such as flood forecasting, require this type of
framework for tracking the contributions of streamflow and precipitation runoff to total streamflow
at any point downstream in a basin.   However, there is a tendency to use  basin and hydrologic
frameworks  to summarize ecological data.  Because  hydrologic units  are based  on topographic
drainage contours and political management needs, rather than on characteristics that control surface
water quality, the units contain a considerable mix of vegetation, soils, land-surface form, and land
use characteristics. Thus, data from more than one environmental region are aggregated within each
framework unit.
      A specific example of this situation is a set of maps compiled to illustrate violations of national
standards for fecal coliform, dissolved oxygen,  and total  phosphorus in United States streams
(Council on Environmental Quality 1979).  The data were obtained at or near the mouths of major
rivers and their principal tributaries. The quality measured at each sampling point was projected to
its entire upstream basin, though the environmental characteristics impinging on the upper portions
of the watersheds did not usually reflect those at the sample site locations.  A case in point is the
Willamette River Basin in Oregon. More than half the streams in the basin and 95% of the summer
streamflow originate in the Cascade Mountains and have extremely low phosphorus levels. Streams
draining the valley portion of the basin have fairly high levels of phosphorus, due to rich valley soils,
                                             12

-------
agricultural land use, and higher population  densities.  To extrapolate basin-wide water quality
information from any one sampling point on the river is misleading.
      Also popular  with resource  managers  and  researchers  are frameworks  derived  from
physiography.  Of these, Fenneman's (1946) has probably been used most often, for example, by
the National Park Service, in its National Natural Landmark Program (Iffrig and Bowles 1983), and
by state and local management agencies and researchers. Like other regional frameworks dependent
on single characteristics, physiographic regions do reflect regional patterns of certain environmental
resources for some parts of the country.   But in areas of flatter terrain,  where surficial geologic
deposits, soils, land use, or vegetation are comparatively more diverse, physiographic regions are not
useful for indicating spatial patterns in resource quality, except perhaps on a more local level.
      Limitations to the utility of this framework also result from the criteria used to classify the
regions  in which some environmentally distinct areas are not recognized because of the particular
way the author chose to  classify them.   The Sand Hills area in Nebraska, for example, is not
represented on Fenneman's Physiographic Region map (1946), yet the area is a unique region of the
United  States, and is recognized on nearly all  other national physiographic, soils, land use, and
vegetation maps.  This kind of problem is common when relying on frameworks based solely on
classification of a single characteristic.

1.6.2 Maps Based on Combinations of Characteristics

      In addition to maps compiled to depict particular environmental characteristics, maps have
also  been compiled to depict regions of a more general nature. In compiling these maps, researchers
and  resource managers have often considered a number of environmental characteristics to delineate
these regions (Bailey 1976; Herbertson 1905;  Omernik 1987a; Rowe and Sheard 1981; Wiken 1986).
Two of the most commonly used national frameworks are: Land Resource Regions and Major Land
Resource Areas of the United States (Austin 1972; U.S. Department of   Agriculture  1981) and
Ecoregions of the  United States (Bailey 1976).  Both frameworks incorporate hierarchical levels of
resolution and have some utility for environmental resource management.
      Land Resource Regions and Major Land Resource Areas (MLRA), originally compiled by
Austin (1972), has undergone one revision (U.S. Department of Agriculture 1981) and is currently
undergoing a second. The intended purpose of the MLRA map was to provide a geographic basis
for  making  national-  and  regional-level management decisions  about agricultural concerns,
inventorying and determining research needs, extrapolating information from site specific research
to other areas within the regions, and spatially organizing resource conservation programs.  At the
time of its compilation, the MLRA map  was probably the best available  framework for  meeting
these objectives.  The continued developmental nature of this regional framework, and of regional
frameworks in general, is illustrated by the subsequent recognition of the need for its revision.
      Three  factors  in the MLRA compilation  process weakened its utility  as  a management
framework. First, although the delineation of the  regions was based on a number of environmental
                                             13

-------
characteristics, the work was heavily dependent on soils maps that, for many parts of the United
States, particularly forested areas, were of low reliability. Second, the MLRA map represented a
composite effort by  individual states and  groups of states working independently to compile
information and delineate  regions for  different portions of the country (Dierking, pers. comm.).
Method and resolution of regional interpretation were  not consistent across the country.  For
instance, the Northern Lakes States Forest and Forage Land Resource Region, in the Upper Midwest,
is divided into many small MLRAs, apparently based on very local geomorphic features rather than
on distinct differences in overall land-surface form, soils, vegetation, or  land use.  On the other
hand, the Willamette and Puget Sound Valley MLRA combines two valleys of very different climate,
land-surface form, soils, vegetation, and land use.  Finally, the regional hierarchy of the map is not
discrete; a single MLRA may be assigned to more than one resource region.  For  example,  the
Southern Rockies MLRA (map unit 48A) is included in both the Western Range and Irrigated Region
and the Rocky Mountain Range and Forest Region. This is the case for several of the MLRA map
units.
      Ecoregions of the United States was  developed  by Bailey (1976) to provide a hierarchical
geographic framework primarily for environmental resources managed by, or of interest to, the U.S.
Forest Service.  The map was developed  with a principal interest in the  forested portions of the
United States.  Although Bailey considered patterns in climate, soils, vegetation, and land-surface
form in compiling the map,  his regional  boundaries were fundamentally  based on one particular
characteristic (climate, potential natural vegetation, or land-surface form) at each hierarchical level
of his classification.  By relying on maps of single geographic factors for delineating  regions at
individual hierarchical levels, the quality of the resulting framework suffers where data from the
specific factor are deficient, or where other factors have greater influence on, and  thus may be
more indicative  of, environmental  change. We tried to use Bailey's framework for sorting spatial
patterns in stream quality (Hughes and Omernik 1981; Omernik et al.  1982), but  when  the
classification was tested, the framework proved inadequate.

 1.7   SECTION SUMMARY

      In this section we have discussed (1) the concept of regions and the various aspects inherent
in regional frameworks,  including  the level  of  resolution, thematic specificity, and  boundary
precision, (2) the use of frameworks for selecting reference  sites in order to make inferences about
the regional quality of resources,  (3) the major factors affecting the delineation of regions, namely,
the references consulted and the  approaches followed, and (4) examples of environmental regions,
commenting on their respective attributes and  limitations.
      In  the next section, we  describe the development of our regional  framework and list  and
 explain the steps used in regionalization. Two specific projects are detailed as examples of how the
 procedures  have been applied at  different levels of resolution.
                                              14

-------
                                        SECTION 2

      DEVELOPMENT OF ECOREGIONS OF THE CONTERMINOUS UNITED STATES

2.1   INTRODUCTION

     In this section we trace the development of an environmental regional framework at the U.S.
EPA  Environmental Research  Laboratory in  Corvallis,  Oregon.  A general  explanation  of the
resulting delineation process that evolved from this experience is provided. Further detail of the
steps involved is illustrated in the discussion  of  two specific delineation projects  addressed  at
different  levels  of resolution.   In  the first  project, ecoregions  of  relatively  homogeneous
environmental characteristics were delineated for  the entire conterminous United States.  In the
second project, within-region variability was further sorted to derive subregions of the ecoregions
intersecting the state of Colorado.

2.2  BACKGROUND

     Development of Ecoregions of the Conterminous United States (Omernik 1987a) began through
efforts  to classify streams for more effective management of  water resources.  Initially, we tried
to use the framework by Bailey (1976) and the MLRA framework (U.S. Department of Agriculture
1981), but found both frameworks inadequate due to the reasons described in Subsection 1.6.2.
At this time,  certain states were also realizing a need for a new framework  to aid in  managing
water resources.  This interest  led to a joint effort initially with the states of Arkansas and Ohio
(documented in Hughes and Larsen 1988; Larsen et al. 1986,  1988; Rohm et al. 1987; Whittier et
al.  1987) in the development and evaluation of a regional management framework (see  Appendix
B).  Later, projects were begun in Minnesota (Heiskary et al.  1987) and Oregon (Hughes et  al.
1987; Whittier et al. 1988). To  address management needs, it was important that ecosystem regions
reflect  similarities  in the type,  quality,  and quantity of water resources, and  the factors that
impact them.  We based the design of this framework on the observation  that surface waters tend
to reflect characteristics of the watersheds they drain (Beschta  and Platts 1986; Karr et al. 1986;
Warren 1979), which in turn reflect larger, regional patterns of combinations of environmental
variables.   These  combinations  vary spatially across  the  country,  altering the importance  of
different variables in determining the character of each region.
      After delineating ecoregions in Arkansas, Minnesota, Ohio, and Oregon, reference sites were
selected for data collection and analysis (Sections 3 and 4) to evaluate the framework. Preliminary
evaluation indicated potential utility in delineating ecoregions in a consistent way for the rest of
the conterminous United States  (Omernik  1987a).  A national  map was  produced  at  a scale  of
 1:7,500,000 depicting one hierarchical level of regions. Multi-state maps, showing the same level
of hierarchy, but  in greater  detail, were published at a scale  of  1:2,500,000 (Omernik  1987b,
                                             15

-------
1987c; Omernik  and Gallant  1986,  1987a, 1987b,  1987c,  1988).   Other hierarchical  levels of
ecoregions are currently being developed,  including a coarse level of aggregated ecoregions for
national  level resource  assessment.

2.3  AN OVERVIEW OF  REGIONALIZATION
     One  purpose  of  regionalization  is  to  sort  out spatial  variability  in  environmental
characteristics  we  wish to  manage.   In collecting  and examining reference  information for
delineation of  environmental regions, our aim is to understand as much as possible about the
interest area:   what it  looks like,  the driving environmental features, the kinds of natural and
human impacts commonly influencing the resource quality, and the characteristics supporting the
delineation of the area into regions. Each ecoregion is driven by different types of environmental
features.   Were we to rely  on a  single feature  for regionalization, we would miss significant
regional patterns in many areas. In delineating ecoregions, for instance, we find that land-surface
form has a dominating  effect on  vegetation, soil formation,  and land use in some  parts of the
country, while  annual precipitation more strongly affects these same characteristics in other parts.
Thus,  in delineating boundaries,  it is important to ascertain the  driving  properties  of each
ecoregion, and  vary the combination of characteristics evaluated and regional management concerns
considered, accordingly.  If maintenance  of a cold water fishery is the primary concern in one
region, and reduction of soil erosion in  another, the regionalization process can be customized to
subdivide the ecoregions using  different criteria  to address their respective management issues.
     The actual process of defining, delineating,  describing, and depicting environmental regions
can be diagrammed as a series of steps (Figure 2-1), on which the following paragraphs elaborate.
The entire process centers around the decisions made during definition of the scope of the project
(Figure 2-1 A).  The type  of  reference materials  collected, the  environmental  characteristics
examined  for  spatial patterns, the  degree of detail (resolution)  considered,  and  the  specific
adjustments made regarding boundary placement all depend on the resource and areal concerns
and  objectives defined  during  this initial stage.   Outlining  the location of areas  and issues (or
resources) of concern on a map assists in setting reasonable project priorities and provides a spatial
layout of the logistical situations (e.g., accessibility) affecting the project.  Considered in concert
with desired project outputs, the map helps to  clarify the level of resolution  that will be needed
to accomplish the project aims.
     In projects designed to address more than one resource  concern or objective, issues should
be prioritized  to set a  protocol for making decisions.   For  instance, during consideration of
transitional zones between regions, the decision of whether to divide the zone equally between the
adjacent regions or include it entirely within one of the  regions is based on the most meaningful
outcome, given the priorities and objectives of  the project.  A list of priorities  also helps in
planning project strategies, particularly in allocation of human and monetary resources.  Regional
assessment  strategies  can be modified  to cast  more  emphasis  on  specific  locales,  specific
management practices,  and specific resources.

                                              16

-------
                             Define Scope of Project:
                              Outline Interest Area,
                           Clarify and Prioritize Issues,
                                Specify Objectives
                                       I
                        B
                              Obtain Reference Maps
                                 and Materials
                                       I
                         Read and Assimilate Information,
                         Tabulate Regional Characteristics
                               Based on Objectives
                                   Additional
                                  Information
                                    Needed?
                        D
                          Sketch and Refine Boundaries
                                   Additional
                                  Information
                                    Needed?
                              Complete  Boundaries,
                                Draft Final Map,
                           Compose Characterizations
                                for each Region
Figure 2-1.  Flow chart illustrating the steps in regionalization. Steps A through E are explained

           in Section 2.3.
                                        17

-------
     After issues have been prioritized, specific outputs  should be clarified.  The outputs  may
be a regional set of resource quality criteria, an analysis of the effects of a particular management
practice, a regional inventory of a certain  resource, or an ecologically based framework.  For
example, when the  Arkansas Department of Pollution Control  and Ecology  used the  ecoregion
concept to classify streams, their specified output was an ecologically based framework that would
(1) account for the various natural environmental conditions in  the state, (2)  enhance the ability
to select representative reference sites for water quality testing, and (3) provide a structure for
organizing analyses of site  data.  In specifying outputs, a decision is needed  as to what  level of
detail will fulfill management  needs.  This ties directly into the resulting  size of the  regions
delineated.
     Reference  maps  and descriptions  for  regional  analysis  are  initially  sought  on  the
environmental characteristics that are  perceived  to affect  the issues of concern (Figure  2-IB).  It
is likely that additional, or different, information  will  be needed  later  in  the regionalization
process.  The more specific the objectives, the more focused  the references; some frameworks may
incorporate  numerical data.  For example,  Omernik et al.  (1988) compared  data for  lake  total
phosphorus  measurements  along  with mapped  distributions of several environmental variables
relating  to  phosphorus to delineate  lake  phosphorus regions for  Michigan,  Minnesota, and
Wisconsin.   Examination of the data for association with other variables,  such as alkalinity and
seasonal variation, helped to further refine  the  regional patterns in phosphorus concentrations.
     After collecting  reference materials and identifying  the  environmental factors  operating
within an area, we prepare a table of prospective regional characteristics based  on concurrent
spatial patterns  of various combinations  of these factors (Figure 2-1C).   Additional reference
information may be needed to complete this process.  Sometimes, if the information has not yet
been compiled and mapped, maps  of related characteristics may indirectly provide the information.
For  instance, when vegetation maps have  been unavailable,  we have substituted maps of  wildlife
habitat  classes (that were based  on vegetative  characteristics), or inferred plant cover  using a
combination of vegetation community descriptions and maps showing elevation, slope aspect, and
land  cover  (classified as  deciduous  vs. non-deciduous forests and woodlands, shrubs, and
grasslands).
     When tabulating regional characteristics, it is apparent that some regions have a very distinct,
homogeneous set of characteristics, whereas others consist of a mosaic of characteristics too small
to separate into discrete units at the selected level of resolution.  Occasionally, a  region may not
be readily divisible into subregions because changes across  the  region are too subtle to partition
at the  chosen resolution.   This occurred when we delineated  ecological  subregions  of the
Southwestern  Tablelands Ecoregion in Colorado, where subdivisions were  perceived only  by
dropping down  two levels  in resolution (as  defined from available mapped information).
     When we incorporate  numerical data into the regionalization process, we can include ranges
of data values with the tabulation of regional characteristics.  In these cases, spatial patterns of
the mapped data are examined for association with  terrestrial environmental  characteristics.  In
                                              18

-------
some areas,  patterns  in  data  values will correspond  well with particular  features  in  the
environment.  In an analysis of the spatial distribution of lake phosphorus values, Omernik et al.
(1988) noted that patterns of phosphorus values related strongly to mapped patterns of land use
and  potential natural vegetation in some regions, soil type  in others, surficial geology  in  still
others, and so on.
     Spatial patterns of data can be extremely heterogeneous in areas  characterized by a mosaic
of environmental features.  More detailed maps of  environmental features may be  needed to
identify the reasons for the variability in these areas, and management expectations  may need to
accommodate these conditions. There may  be other areas where the mapped numerical data show
distinct regional patterns  that do not correspond with any  mapped distributions of environmental
features.   If the area is  of comparable size to  the regions being defined, it may  be useful to
delineate it, for the sake of management,  because the values show a distinct regional pattern, even
though the environmental associations are not apparent.
     After completing the table of regional characteristics,  we outline the  regional boundaries
(Figure 2-ID).   Locating boundaries  between some regional cores2 may be  difficult.  Areas of
uncertainty occur where  regions abut and the landscape contains characteristics from more than
one  region.  The decision of whether to  include a transitional area within one region, or divide
it among adjacent regions is based on knowledge of each region (from reference material and local
experts)  and consideration of how  the resources of concern  will  be  affected  by  regional
environmental characteristics and management practices.  Delineation  is a necessarily subjective
and  evolving  process;  rules can be defined  for  each  project,  but the  art  of  qualitative
regionalization  is  knowing  when  to diverge  from the rules.   Additional  information  on
environmental characteristics may be needed to support decision-making throughout the delineation
process.  After boundary determinations  have  been completed, a  final  map can be generated and
regional descriptions can be written  (Figure 2-IE).
     2 Regional core refers to an area displaying all of  the characteristics tabulated to define  a
       particular region.   A series of maps identifies regional cores, termed most typical areas,
       of ecoregions across the conterminous United States (Omernik 1987b,  1987c; Omernik and
       Gallant 1986, 1987a  1987b,  1987c, 1988).   Because areas  having a full set of typifying
       characteristics are expected to exhibit the greatest degree of within-region environmental
       homogeneity, they are useful for  locating reference sites  to measure differences among
       regions.
       Boundaries indicating ecoregion cores do not necessarily coincide with boundaries of sub-
       ecoregions.   Subregions are delineated from  reference maps that portray more detail than
       those used to delineate ecoregions and  cores.  Features will  be apparent on the  more
       detailed maps that were not apparent on  the more generalized maps.  If these  features are
       important to the subregion delineation objectives, boundary placement  will be  different
       at the two levels of regionalization.
                                              19

-------
2.4 SPECIFIC EXAMPLES OF REGIONALIZATION

2.4.1  Ecoregions of the Conterminous United States

     One of our goals in developing a national ecoregion framework was to produce a map of
regions that would reflect general spatial patterns in environmental resources.  We did this through
an analysis of a combination of maps of factors that either cause regional variations (e.g., climate,
mineral availability, physiography)  or integrate  causal factors (soils, vegetation, land  use), to
distinguish distinct regional patterns of ecosystems. We used mostly small-scale, low resolution
national maps and general  environmental  descriptions as references.  The combination of small-
scale maps most useful for  delineating ecoregions  consisted of Major Land Uses (Anderson 1970),
Classes of Land-Surface Form (Hammond  1970), and Potential Natural Vegetation (Kiichler 1970),
along with assorted regional (multi-state)  soils maps. These maps,  referred to as the component
maps, are discussed in further detail in the following paragraphs.  Several other maps were also
consulted, generally to verify the regional  accuracy of each of the component maps and to provide
additional details in support of the patterns that indicated ecoregions.  The most helpful of  these
included Surficial Geology (Hunt 1979),  Physical Divisions  (Fenneman 1946), Land  Resource
Regions and Major Land Resource Areas of the  United States (U.S. Department of Agricultural
1981), maps in Climates of the United States (Baldwin 1973), and Census of Agriculture Graphic
Summaries (U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census  1969, 1973, 1978, 1982).
     One of the major  controversies  concerning the  delineation of environmental regions has
centered around analyzing  patterns of land use in addition to patterns of natural features. In one
of the earliest efforts to define ecological regions, Herbertson (1905) examined the  distributions
of a  combination of natural factors  (land-surface form,  climate, and vegetation) along  with
distribution of human development.   Neither his belief  that  human  development should be
considered, nor his notion of summarizing a combination of factors to define regions were well
received.  The concept that land use patterns might reflect land potential, and therefore  be useful
for defining regions,  later  became even less acceptable.  It was thought by some that this was to
subscribe to environmental  determinism3.  Others felt that only factors relating to natural processes
should be examined, rather than surrogates reflecting natural  conditions, regardless of how close
the connection. Today, these beliefs are less prevalent, and the use of any sources that aid in the
definition of  regions is more permissible.   Recent evidence of wider  acceptance is found in
     3 Environmental determinism  refers to the  concept that physical  characteristics in the
       environment, such as climate and soil type, control the distribution and nature of human
       occupation.  The counter-view is that human distribution is more dependent upon cultural,
       rather than physical, dictates, because humans can  modify their habits and technology in
       order to overcome environmental  influences.   These competing  paradigms have been
       strongly debated by geographers throughout much of the twentieth century.
                                             20

-------
Robinson et al. (1978, section on dasymetric mapping) and Wiken (1986, explanation of Terrestrial
Ecozones of Canada).
     Our purpose for employing maps of land use is several-fold.  First, it is not our intention
to define regions because of their land use, but  rather to  use land use maps as an indication of
where spatial changes in natural environmental characteristics, and therefore in resource quality,
occur. The ability of an area to support and withstand a particular economy largely  results from
a particular aggregation of environmental characteristics. Land use can be considered an integrator
of features such as climate, mineral availability and substrate, presence and quality of surface and
subsurface water, physiography, natural vegetation, and so  on.  As  these features change from
place to  place, so does the  total capacity of the land to support a specific  land use.  Land use
maps indicate where these spatial changes occur—where forestry resources, for instance,  dwindle
and  rangeland economy is  more aptly supported.   Land  use maps  indicate  areas where water
resources support irrigated rather than dryland farm agriculture, or  where subtle environmental
changes  favor raising cattle rather than sheep. The environmental variations responsible for these
changes  can be observed  on some or all of the component maps, but without a land use map to
serve as  an indicator of change, many of the nuances pointing to prospective regions might be
overlooked.
     Second, land use maps indicate the spatial  patterns of management practices likely to affect
the regional quality of resources.  Management expectations  for areas subjected to generations of
a particular type of land use  cannot reasonably be based on pristine conditions.  In many areas,
present land cover is so altered from original vegetation  cover  that plant litter contributions to
water chemistry are vastly different  from what  would be expected from studying only  maps of
potential natural vegetation, climate,  physiography,  and soils.  Our experiences in determining
relationships  between nonpoint sources  and stream nutrient levels (Omernik  1977),  defining
patterns  of sensitivity of surface waters to acidification, and refining maps of regional patterns
of lake trophic state have demonstrated that land use patterns correspond well with spatial patterns
of aquatic resource quality.  Maps depicting patterns of geology and soils, although also used in
our  assessments, have never corresponded as well with these variables.
      Finally,  land use maps are generally more  accurate than the other component maps.  Like
physiography, land use can be seen and, thus, mapped more accurately than factors  that must be
interpolated (e.g., geology, soils, and potential natural vegetation) based on data that may or may
not  be representative. Furthermore, land use is mapped at a finer resolution.  It is compiled from
more detailed and complete data than the other maps, often from complete aerial imagery  coverage
and ground-truthing.  However, it is always important to use land use maps in conjunction with
maps of the  other  environmental factors  because  the spread of urbanization and advances in
modern  agricultural technology can override natural regional potential.
      Like a land use  map, a map of potential natural vegetation is  a strong  integrative tool for
illustrating ecosystem patterns. Potential natural vegetation was defined by Kuchler  (1970) as the
vegetation that would exist today if man were removed from the scene and if the resulting plant
                                              21

-------
succession were telescoped into a single moment.  Kilchler used a variety of sources, mostly maps,
of varying accuracy, scale, and level of generality to infer the vegetation communities that would
exist in the absence of human modification. Because Kiichler did not have access to an extensive,
quality  controlled data base, the map is less accurate, and the accuracy and level of detail less
consistent across the country than the land  use map.
     Regional patterns of slope, local relief, and  profile type (e.g., how much of the more gently
sloping  land is located near the larger streams, or away in the interfluves) have been synthesized
into relatively  homogeneous classes of land-surface form by  Hammond (1970).  The map was
compiled at a coarser level of resolution than either the land use or the potential natural vegetation
map.
     We were not able to locate a national soils  map with an acceptable  degree of accuracy and
consistency. The classification scheme of the soil taxonomy map developed by the U.S. Department
of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service (1970) appeared to be  most appropriate for our purposes,
but we  found much disagreement between the units classified on this map  and those shown on
regional and state soils maps. Gersmehl (1977) reported that the inaccuracies shown on the USDA,
Soil Conservation Service map resulted largely from poor base data and inappropriate compilation
techniques.  Thus, we  relied mainly on regional- and state-level soils maps for assessing regional
patterns.
     Because of the interrelatedness of the environmental factors depicted on these component maps,
and on the other reference maps we analyzed (e.g., Baldwin 1973; Fenneman 1946; Hunt 1979; U.S.
Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census 1969, 1973, 1978; U.S. Department of Agriculture
1981), we expected congruent spatial patterns across maps of different variables.  The four main
component maps were analyzed together to detect potential regions that were relatively homogeneous
in overlapping patterns of soils, land use, land-surface form, and potential natural vegetation. The
identifying classes of each component were tabulated to characterize each prospective ecoregion. The
key to  this process was  distinguishing  the  overall regional homogeneity in a combination of
characteristics from the heterogeneity in each characteristic. Some ecoregions could be clearly and
easily delineated because of the distinctiveness of all four characteristics  relative  to  adjacent
ecoregions; other regions were less distinct  and were distinguished by broader classes or groupings
of some of the characteristics.
     The size of each ecoregion was a function of within-region homogeneity relative to among-
region variation  at a  spatial scale believed  to be most  useful for state and regional  resource
management.  For these purposes, ecoregions could not be so large as to contain entire topographic
watersheds greater than 500 km2 that exhibited characteristics more indicative of other, contrasting
areas or regions.  This  resulted in a range of ecoregion sizes, from 15,000 km2 (i.e., the Willamette
Valley Ecoregion) to 330,000 km2 (i.e., the Southeastern Plains Ecoregion), but commonly on the
order of 130,000 km2.   Some regions exhibited a mosaic of conditions common throughout the
region,  that were too small and patchy to allow further delineation at this resolution.  The Central
Appalachian Ridge and Valley Ecoregion, for example, was characterized by such contrasts; there,
drainage basins of at least 500 km2 all contain forested mountains and agricultural valley bottoms.

                                             22

-------
     Delineating actual regional boundaries involved an iterative process of both map overlay and
qualitative analysis of the relative accuracy and level of generality of each component map. Potential
regions were initially sketched and typifying characteristics were tabulated. Boundaries were located
using those component maps determined to be most relevant for defining each region.  Since each
component map was compiled at a different level of generality,  with varying levels of accuracy
relative to the true locations of the characteristics represented, as well as to the source material used
in map compilation, the usefulness of the map alignments for drawing ecoregion boundaries varied.
After superimposing the component  maps, evaluating  and compensating for the differences  in
accuracies and generalities of each, and identifying the obvious regional interrelationships among the
component characteristics, final ecoregion boundaries were drawn. An example of the  component
map alignments used in the delineation of the Nebraska Sand Hills Ecoregion is shown in Figure 2-2.
Examples of the decisions and rationale used in regionalization are presented in further detail in the
following subsection.
     The component maps in Figure 2-2 all show the same regional pattern for the Sand Hills area,
but boundary placement varies from map to map. In this case, the final ecoregion boundary was
derived by overlaying  and mentally averaging the boundaries from the four component maps (in
other cases, the importance of boundaries on individual component maps was weighted differently,
due to knowledge about map quality or detail). In averaging these boundaries, we smoothed the more
detailed resolution portrayed on the land use and potential natural vegetation maps to depict the
general nature  of our ecoregion framework at a map scale of 1:7,500,000.
     In actuality,  there is no discrete, correct location  for placement of lines on a map,  because
regional boundaries  represent transitional areas.  Sites located near regional boundaries often have
characteristics typical of more than one region. For this reason, it is necessary to field-check specific
sites  to  judge  which  region the site environmental characteristics  most nearly represent.  The
environmental characteristics used to define each ecoregion in the conterminous United States appear
in tables printed on the back of national and regional ecoregion maps (Omernik 1987a,  1987b, 1987c;
Omernik and Gallant 1987a, 1987b, 1987c, 1988).
      For final depiction, the ecoregions were color-coded to convey a sense of broader, multi-
regional patterns.  This was done by selecting colors that conveyed common perceptions reflecting
vegetative cover and/or  land use.  Regions characterized mostly by cropland were assigned shades
of orange and brown.  Regions characterized by forests  were  assigned shades of green;  and regions
characterized by wetlands  or very wet forests  were assigned shades of blue.   Grasslands were
generally depicted by  shades of  yellow, and very arid areas by  shades of pink or red.  Regions
characterized by a mosaic of vegetative cover or land use were generally assigned a color  midway
between those  usually  used to portray the individual characteristics.  Because of the proximity of
similar regions in parts of the country, it was sometimes necessary to assign a color merely to contrast
with the surrounding hues.
                                             23

-------
            Land-Surface
                Form >
           Potential
            Natural
          Vegetation
                                SAND  HILLS
                                 ECOREGION
Figure 2-2.  Spatial distributions of four environmental characteristics used to delineate the Sand
            Hills Ecoregion. The general agreement of patterns in land-surface form (Hammond
            1970), soils (U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service 1970), potential
            natural vegetation (Kilchler 1970), and  land use (Anderson 1970) clearly suggests a
            distinct area.  Differences in the relative accuracy and resolution of information shown
            on maps of these characteristics necessitated qualitative analysis of these and other maps
            of the area to determine the actual limits of the combination of factors that identify the
            regions.
                                            24

-------
     We have since aggregated ecoregions to address broader areas of interest at national levels of
management (these maps exist in draft form only).  For example, concerns of the Environmental
Protection Agency resulted in the delineation of four different aggregate  frameworks to address
surface water ecosystems, agricultural ecosystems, forest ecosystems, and wetlands ecosystems. The
aggregation of ecoregions is  somewhat different for each category of ecosystem because of the
different priorities and interests in each of the four subject areas.  Ecoregions  have also  been
subdivided to sort within-region variability to increase management utility at the  state level.  An
example of the latter is detailed in the following subsection.

2.4.2.  Ecological  Subregions of Colorado

     Because of interest shown by the Environmental Protection Agency regional office in Denver,
Colorado,  we  designed a  higher resolution ecoregion map  for inventory,  monitoring,  and
assessment of surface water resources in Colorado.  The framework was based on sorting within-
region variability  of ecoregions delineated by Omernik (1987a) and Omernik and Gallant (1987a),
resulting in ecological subdivisions of ecoregions (Plate 1).  The resulting map units were more
consistent  in  size  with areas investigated and  reported on  by  the  state.  Subregion size  was
generally dictated by concurrent distributional patterns of most environmental features shown on
l:500,000-scale to l:2,000,000-scale reference maps.
     To subdivide individual ecoregions, we  gathered maps and other interpretive references on
a variety of environmental characteristics  for Colorado and the surrounding states (Appendix A).
Since ecoregion boundaries and resource management responsibilities transcend state boundaries,
we obtained reference maps for states outside of Colorado to cover the extent  of the ecoregions.
This enabled  us to understand how environmental  patterns occurring in Colorado fit within the
larger ecoregion context.  We then appraised the suitability and quality of the reference materials
and began a second information search to strengthen the more questionable references.
     We used the same process as previously described for defining and delineating Ecoregions
of the Conterminous United States  (Subsection  2.4.1), but  at  a finer  resolution.   Our intent
throughout Subsections 2.4.2.1 to  2.4.2.12 is  to provide examples that document regionalization,
including  how  we perceive regions and subregions, how  we  decide  on the  most important
characteristics for distinguishing regions and subregions, and how we decide to segregate an area
as a subregion at  a particular level of resolution.  The  numerical  designations following the name
of each ecoregion are  based on map unit numbers published on national (Omernik 1987a) and
multi-state (Omernik and Gallant  1987a)  ecoregion maps.

2.4.2.1 Description of the Wyoming Basin Ecoregion  (map unit #18)—

     Most of the  Wyoming Basin Ecoregion receives less than 300  mm of precipitation annually.
 The level  to irregular terrain is broken by steep-sided drainage channels and occasional hills and
                                              25

-------
low mountains.  High mountains border the Basin, supplying the primary perennial streamflow to
the ecoregion.  The ecoregion is dominated by arid shrublands.  Big sagebrush is the dominant
shrub  in many areas,  intermixed with  rhizomatous wheatgrasses,  drought resistant bluegrass
species, needle-and-thread, Indian ricegrass, bitterbrush, balsamroot, and lupine. Saltdeserts are
sparsely inhabited by saltbush, greasewood, iodinebush, sagewort, saltgrass, winterfat, and hopsage.
There  are some woodland communities, characterized by Rocky Mountain juniper and oak scrub.
Ustic Torriorthents are the dominant soils. The region as a whole is used for rangeland, but many
areas lack sufficient vegetation to support livestock.

2.4.2.2  Subregionalization of the Wyoming Basin Ecoregion—

     In assessing which environmental characteristics would most affect aquatic resource quality
in this ecoregion, we noticed that the greatest degree of environmental variability was depicted
on  the vegetation map.  However, at the resolution of our reference maps, none of the other
environmental characteristics showed patterns concurrent with those on the vegetation map.  The
vegetation  map  indicated  that saltdesert vegetation communities throughout Colorado and
surrounding  states generally colonize the most arid areas.   In the  Wyoming  Basin Ecoregion,
however, sagebrush communities, usually found  in relatively less arid areas  than saltdesert
communities, occur in the driest tracts.  We felt that in both plant community types, grazing and
recreation potential would be very low, surface erosion would be high, and most of the drainages
would be intermittent or ephemeral,  so there was little reason for partitioning subregions  based
on the two plant community types.
     On examination of woodland communities, we found  that they inhabit either steep side-
walls of tablelands and dry (throughout most of the year) drainages in the arid portions of the
ecoregion, or slopes of high  hills and low mountains in the semiarid portions.  In the first  case,
areas would  be  subject to  a  high  degree  of alluvial and  colluvial  erosion  and, because  of
inaccessibility due to steepness of terrain, would offer extremely low potential for recreation and
grazing.  Such areas would have somewhat lower water quality potential because higher rates of
erosion would result in higher  stream sediment loads as compared to the lower  relief shrublands;
but, as the  shrublands themselves offer  very limited potential,  there  is  no  strong  reason  to
distinguish this type of wooded area separately. In the case of the other type of woodland habitat,
rainfall and  runoff  conditions offer  somewhat better  water quality potential than the regional
norm,  averaging from 300 to 400 mm of rainfall and 25 to  50 mm of runoff each year.  These
woodlands inhabit isolated hills and mountains, and offer relatively  better quality resources for
recreation and grazing.  Nevertheless, their areal extent is so  small  in Colorado (they are more
extensive in  Wyoming), that they are not clearly represented on our reference  maps.  This type
of detail would be suitable for delineation at a still  finer resolution, but  not at the  level of our
maps.
                                             26

-------
     Examination of the Wyoming Basin Ecoregion  resulted in recognition of one  subregion
within the Colorado portion of the ecoregion (subregion numbers correspond with those depicted
on the map  of Ecological Subregions of Colorado [Plate 1]):

     a.    Semiarid to arid shrublands of the Wyoming Basin (man  unit #18-1)

          1.   Climate - Arid to semiarid. Much of the subregion receives less than 300 mm of
               precipitation annually; the rest receives between 300 and 400 mm.  The Wyoming
               portion is drier, averaging only 175 mm in some areas.  Precipitation occurs mainly
               in spring and  fall.

          2.   Physiography  - Irregular basin terrain with isolated mountains and plateaus. Local
               relief (i.e., the variation in topographic relief over 10 km2) is generally greater than
               30 m, and often greater than 120 m. Steep side slopes of uplands can have 180 m
               of local relief.

          3.   Land Use - Extremely low capacity rangeland for beef cattle and sheep.

          4.   Vegetation - Widely scattered shrubs.  Sagebrush-dominated shrublands include big
               sagebrush mixed with drought  resistant grasses such as  wheatgrass, fescue, and
               bluegrass species, needle-and-thread,  and Indian ricegrass.   Saltbush-dominated
               shrublands include saltbush, greasewood, iodinebush, sagewort, saltgrass, winterfat,
               and hopsage.  Rocky Mountain juniper and pinon pine are found on some uplands.

          5.   Soils - Entisols4.

          6.   Relative Surface Water Quality - Surface water resources are mainly intermittent
               and ephemeral streams. The few perennial streams originate from the surrounding
               mountainous  ecoregions.  The sparse rural  population  relies  heavily upon the
               meager subsurface water supply.  Surface water quality is affected by  input from
               highly credible  soils (some soils have  naturally high  salinity and  alkalinity),
               amplified by  high evaporation  rates and water withdrawals.
      4 Maps depicting soil types were not useful for sorting the within-region variability of most
        of the ecoregions in Colorado.  Thus, soil information  usually  reflects  the resolution
        perceived at the ecoregion,  rather than subregion, level.
                                              27

-------
2.4.2.3  Description of the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion (#20)--

     Rugged tableland topography  is typical of  the  Colorado Plateaus  Ecoregion.  Precipitous
side-walls mark abrupt changes in local relief, often from 300 to 600 m.  The regional  climate
is arid to semi-arid, with most of the region receiving less than 400 mm of precipitation annually,
although a few areas receive 500 or 600 mm.  Low annual rainfall and high rates of evaporation
render nearly all of the regional surface waters intermittent or ephemeral; perennial streams have
headwaters in the adjacent Southern Rockies Ecoregion.  The Colorado Plateaus are used mainly
as rangeland, although the naturally sparse  vegetation does not support much livestock. Soils are
mostly Entisols  and Aridisols.  Vegetation is similar to that of  the Wyoming Basin  Ecoregion;
shrublands are dominated by big  sagebrush or saltbush-greasewood; pifion-juniper  woodlands
occur on uplands  to a much greater extent than in the Wyoming Basin.

2.4.2.4  Subregionalization of the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion—

     ^Reference  maps and text for  the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion indicate that high salinity in
soils and surface and subsurface waters affect vegetation and, consequently, land  use capability
in several areas within the ecoregion, although distribution patterns on the soils  map did not
correspond with these patterns. Saline areas are generally associated with lower rangeland potential
than nonsaline areas, average  annual precipitation  of less than 250 mm per  year, and deposits of
Mancos shale (the weathering of this particular formation is known to  be  associated with high
salinity in soil and water).  All of these factors reinforced the need for separating  the salcdeserts
from the remainder of the ecoregion.
     Another association occurs between areas of  greater topographic relief and areas populated
by  woodland vegetation.   Juniper  and pinon often occupy steep, rocky terrain, which  is less
accessible to livestock and more susceptible to erosion.  Thus, rangeland potential is ultimately
lower  in wooded than nonwooded areas,  although  for  flatter, drier  tracts having little or no
vegetation, woodland grazing  capacity may  be greater5.  We felt it worthwhile to separate wooded
areas from shrubland dominated areas, resulting in the  delineation of three subregions:

     a.   Desert Shrublands of the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion  (map unit  #20-1)

          1.   Climate - Arid to semiarid.  200 to 400 mm  precipitation over most of subregion;
               a few areas receive "up  to 500 mm. High rates of evaporation.
     5 There is some degree of overlap of resource quality in all subregions in the Colorado
       Plateaus  Ecoregion because of  the  variability in environmental characteristics.   This is
       probably true of subregions in most ecoregions.
                                             28

-------
    2.   Physiography  -  Irregular plains to tablelands, where local relief commonly is
         between 200 to 300 m.

    3.   Land Use -  Rangeland.  Of the three subregions, this one generally has the best
         grazing potential, but range quality is still very low.

    4.   Vegetation - Sagebrush shrubland; mainly includes big sagebrush, rabbitbrush,
         and assorted drought-resistant grasses (e.g., wheatgrass, Indian ricegrass, bluegrass).

    5.   Soils - Aridisols and Entisols.

    6.   Relative  Surface  Water Quality  -  Surface  water  resources  exist  mainly as
         intermittent and ephemeral streams.   Perennial streams  originate in neighboring
         mountainous ecoregions.   Stream quality is affected  by high concentrations of
         sediments and salinity from highly erodible soils.

b.   Saltdeserts of the Colorado Plateaus Ecoreeion (map unit #20-2)

     1.    Climate - Arid. Less than 250 mm precipitation annually, mostly occurring in fall
          and spring.

     2.    Physiography - Nearly level to irregular valley floors.

     3.    Land Use - Mostly poor quality rangeland for beef cattle and sheep.  Irrigated
          agriculture  is concentrated in  river valleys where perennial streams flow from
          neighboring mountainous ecoregions.   Orchard crops  (apples,  peaches, pears,
          cherries), hay, grain, and vegetables  (e.g., onions,  beans) are cultivated in these
          valleys.

     4.   Vegetation  -  Saltbush shrubland; includes saltbush, greasewood,  rabbitbrush,
          horsebrush, and grasses (Indian ricegrass, galleta).

     5.   Soils - Aridisols and Entisols.

     6.   Relative  Surface Water Quality - Surface water primarily occurs as intermittent
          and ephemeral streams.  Perennial flow is sustained in streams originating  from
          neighboring mountainous ecoregions.  Stream quality is affected by highly  erodible
          soils, naturally high salinity (magnified by irrigation return flows from cropland),
          runoff of farm chemicals, and municipal wastes.
                                          29

-------
     c.    Wooded Uplands of the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion (map unit #20-3)

          1.    Climate - Arid to semiarid.  200 to  400 mm precipitation occurs  annually over
               most of subregion; greater than 600 mm occurs around Douglas Pass in Garfield
               County, CO.

          2.    Physiography  - Tablelands; local relief is often from 200 to 300 m.

          3.    Land Use - Very poor quality rangeland for beef cattle and sheep.  Of the three
               subregions,  this  one generally  offers the lowest grazing  potential.   It  has the
               rockiest terrain, is typically farthest from surface water supply, and  has the lowest
               density of suitable forage.

          4.    Vegetation -  Juniper and pinon  pine  woodland.  Grass  and shrub  understory
               includes wheatgrass,  Indian ricegrass, grama, and sagebrush.

          5.    Soils - Aridisols and Entisols.

          6.    Relative  Surface  Water  Quality  - Surface water supplies are intermittent and
               ephemeral.  Rare locations include  portions of perennial  streams  flowing from
               adjacent mountainous ecoregions.  Water quality is affected by low annual precip-
               itation, high rates of  evaporation, highly erodible soils, and  naturally high salinity.

2.4.2.5  Description of the Southern Rockies Ecoregion (#21)—

     The  Southern Rockies Ecoregion has the  most distinct set of environmental  characteristics
of all of  the  Colorado ecoregions.  The region is dominated  by high  elevation,  steep, rugged
mountains; coniferous forests cover much  of the  ecoregion.  The range  of average annual
precipitation is very large, from less than 300 mm to more than 1,500 mm.  Precipitation occurs
both as snow  and rain and supports primarily  perennial surface waters.
     Mountains of 3,300 to 3,600 m above sea level are common, although many are higher. At
these elevations, vegetation is limited to low growth  shrubs, cushion plants, and forbs.  Stunted,
deformed conifers mark the upper tree-line  at about 3,350 m.  Below this, cool, moist habitats,
blanketed by  snow much  of  the year, are inhabited by spruce-fir  forests.   Middle and  lower
elevations (down  to  1,700 m) provide  warm, dry  habitats colonized  by both  evergreen and
deciduous trees, while large semiarid to arid pockets are populated by shrubland  species.   Soils
throughout the mountains have formed from a variety of sedimentary and crystalline materials.
The distribution  of major soil orders follows  a pattern  of  elevational banding, much  like that
found in the distribution of major vegetation types.
                                             30

-------
     Recreation, livestock grazing, wildlife habitat, and mining are the leading land uses in the
Southern Rockies.  Recreation occurs at all elevations and  includes year-round outdoor sports.
Livestock graze areas that are snow-free three or more months of the year. A variety of metals
and other elements are mined throughout the ecoregion; two areas of particularly intensive mining
occur in the mountains west and southwest of Denver, near Leadville and Breckenridge, and in
the southwestern portion of the state, around Telluride, Silverton, and Ouray.

2.4.2.6  Subregionalization of the Southern Rockies Ecoregion--

     The correspondence between  distribution patterns of climate, soil development, vegetation,
and  land use with elevation is an outstanding feature of the Southern Rockies  Ecoregion.  Other
factors, such as slope aspect, degree of topographic relief, and surficial geology, also affect these
distributions, but on a more local  level.
     Information from the reference maps and texts indicated  a number of potential subregions.
Our main aim was to produce a framework that would recognize only the most important ones,
without becoming distracted by details.  We were concerned with recognizing too many subregion
types, because the  convoluted nature  of the Rocky Mountains, combined  with  the  climatic
elevational  gradient, could lead to  delineation of  numerous  discontinuous areas  too  small to
reasonably monitor and manage. Also, too many subregion classes would hinder the  extrapolation
of information at this level of resolution. These details would be more properly recognized at  a
finer scale, using more detailed component maps to sort variability.
      Certain prospective  subregions are  more obvious than others.   One of  these is  the high
alpine, rugged  terrain dominated by glacial  meltwaters, exposed rock, young  soils,  sparse
krummholz trees, and periglacial vegetation.  This area, covered with snow nearly year-round, is
relatively  free of impact from land  development,  livestock grazing,  and mineral extraction.
Another conspicuous subregion class is the low  to mid-elevation,  arid to semiarid area vegetated
by scrub trees, shrubs, and grasses,  and subject to land  development  and heavy  impact from
 grazing.  More difficult to resolve is  the band  of relatively ungrazed, varied coniferous  forests
 separating these two subregion classes.
      We  decided to split the  forested middle ground into  (1) a  higher elevation zone, covered
 predominantly by spruce-fir forests, and (2) a lower elevation  zone, colonized  by a  patchwork of
 forest types including blue spruce, Douglas-fir, white fir,  and ponderosa pine. Our intent was
 to separate the areas likely to produce higher water quality (less hospitable to  biota, less biomass
 input from plants and animals, and less human impact),  from those likely to  produce relatively
 lower  water  quality  (more accessible,  more  input  from forest  understory,  and more  land
 development and grazing).
      We used ecosystem  descriptions and  maps depicting  land use/land  cover, topographic
 contours, and annual precipitation to help us determine the boundary between what we believed
 were the two qualitatively different subregions.  In general, spruce-fir forests  are associated with
                                              31

-------
the higher quality areas.   Certain species, such  as  aspen and  Gambel oak,  are  ubiquitous
throughout the coniferous zones.  The four subregions delineated  for  the  Southern Rockies
Ecoregion consist of:

     a.    High Elevation Tundra of the Southern Rockies Ecoregion  (map unit #21-1)

          1.   Climate - Cold and humid to arid.  Although annual precipitation is from 750 to
              1,500 mm, mostly occurring as snow, snow is removed by strong winds in some
              areas, resulting in locally arid environments.

          2.   Physiography -  Mountaintops  above  3,300 m.  Local  relief is  from   300 to
              600 m.

          3.   Land Use - Wildlife habitat and recreation.  Use is limited by inaccessibility, as
              most portions  are  snow-free for only four  to six weeks.   Some portions  are
              perennially snow-covered.

          4.   Vegetation -  Periglacial vegetation of low  growth shrubs,  cushion plants, and
              forbs.  The forest-tundra interface (around 3,300 to 3,600 m elevation) is sparsely
              colonized by stunted, deformed Englemann spruce, subalpine fir,  limber pine, and
              bristlecone pine.

          5.   Soils - Pergelic  Cryumbrepts and Cryochrepts, formed largely  from crystalline
              rocks and rock outcrops.

          6.   Relative Surface  Water Quality - Surface water is plentiful, consisting of perennial
              streams  and  small lakes.  High quality  is maintained due  to  inaccessibility to
              humans and large mammals throughout most of the year.

     b.    Cool and Moist Forests  of the Middle to High  Elevations of the Southern Rockies
          Ecoregion (map unit #21-2)

          1.   Climate - Cool and humid.   750 to  1,000 mm of annual precipitation falls over
              most of the subregion, mainly as snow, and remains on the ground well into the
              summer months.

          2.   Physiography  -  Steep  slopes of the  Rocky  Mountains, from  about 2,700 to
              3,300 m elevation.  Local relief is often  from 300 to 600 m or more.
                                            32

-------
    3.   Land Use - Wildlife habitat, recreation, and mining. Grazing is limited by climatic
         conditions, lack of forage vegetation, and inaccessibility from excessively steep
         terrain and lingering snowpack.

    4.   Vegetation -  Dense forests dominated by Engelmann spruce and subalpine fir;
         some areas are locally dominated by aspen.  Forest understory is sparse.

    5.   Soils - Rock outcrops and Cryoboralfs and Haploborolls weathered from a variety
         of crystalline and sedimentary materials.

    6.   Relative Surface  Water Quality -  Abundant  perennial streams and small  lakes
         have fairly high quality except where disturbed by mining activities.

c.    Warm and Drv Forests of the Middle  to Low  Elevations  of  the Southern Rockies
     Ecoregion (map unit #21-3)

     1.   Climate - Warm and dry. Average annual precipitation is  about 400 to 750 mm,
         occurring  as both snow and rain.  The annual snow-free period lasts a minimum
         of four  months.

     2.   Physiography - Steep,  lower  to mid-elevation mountain slopes  of  the Southern
          Rockies (about 1,700 to 2,700 m).  Local relief is from 300  to 400  m.

     3.    Land Use -  Livestock grazing, wildlife habitat, mineral extraction and recreation.

     4.    Vegetation  -  Variety of communities  including  aspen, Douglas-fir, ponderosa
          pine, Gambel oak, and pinon pine-juniper  woodlands.

     5.   Soils - Borolls and Boralfs.  Derived from crystalline and sedimentary rocks under
          various conditions ranging  from  cold, humid, high elevation  forests to warm,
          semiarid, low elevation shrublands and grasslands.

     6.   Relative Surface Water Quality - Surface water occurs mainly as perennial streams.
          Resources are plentiful, and are affected mainly by livestock grazing and trampling
          of- riparian   vegetation,  mineral  extraction,  particularly  placer  mining,  and
          recreational and rural developments.
                                         33

-------
     d.    Low to Middle Elevation. Semi-Desert Shrublands of the Southern Rockies Ecoregion
          (map unit #21-4)

          1.    Climate - Semiarid. Receives from 300 to 400 mm of annual precipitation, mainly
               as rain.

          2.    Physiography - Rolling to irregular terrain of the lower to mid-elevation portions
               of the Southern Rockies.  Local relief varies from 60 to 300 m.

          3.    Land Use - Grazing.   Areas adjacent to large perennial streams are irrigated.

          4.    Vegetation - Shrublands  of  greasewood, four-winged  saltbush,  shadscale, and
               sagebrush, often interspersed with grasses.

          5.    Soils - Borolls.  Derived from a variety of sedimentary and  crystalline rocks.

          6.    Relative Surface Water Quality - Water resources occur mainly as perennial and
               intermittent streams. Quality is poor, affected by grazing, mineral extraction and,
               along some streams, rural community wastes  and farm chemicals.

2,4.2.7  Description of the Arizona/New  Mexico Plateau Ecoregion (#22)—

     The  Arizona/New Mexico Plateau Ecoregion represents a large transitional region between
the semiarid  grasslands and low relief tablelands of the Southwestern Tablelands Ecoregion and
the drier woodlands and shrubs and higher relief tablelands of the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion.
Comprising the gradient between these  two  ecoregions, the Arizona/New  Mexico  Plateau has
Shrublands of big sagebrush, rabbitbrush, and winterfat, woodlands of pinon pine and juniper,
and  grasslands of western wheatgrass, green needlegrass, blue  grama, and  needle-and-thread.
Local relief varies from a few meters,  on plains and mesa tops, to well over 300 m along tableland
side slopes. The ecoregion has a semiarid to arid climate, receiving between 300 and 400 mm of
precipitation annually.
     Rangeland is  the primary  land  use throughout  most  of  the ecoregion;  but a large and
contrastingly unique area in Colorado, the San Luis Valley, is  a nearly isolated, relatively flat,
arid (less  than 200 mm precipitation  annually) valley,  with enough perennial stream flow and
groundwater  from the surrounding Southern  Rocky Mountains to support irrigated  agriculture.
Other cropland areas  within the  ecoregion are very small, widely scattered tracts  along large
perennial  streams.   Other than perennial stream flow originating in nearby mountainous regions,
surface  water resources in this ecoregion consist of  intermittent and ephemeral streams.
                                             34

-------
2.4.2.8  Subregionalization of the Arizona/New Mexico Plateau Ecoregion--

     Ecosystems are similar to those found in the Southwestern Tablelands and Colorado Plateaus
Ecoregions. The driest areas (200 mm of annual precipitation or less) coincide with relatively flat
to irregular plains supporting a saltbush-greasewood shrub community.  Big sagebrush communities
are common elsewhere throughout the ecoregion.  Grasses cover large areas,  generally providing
better range conditions than are found in shrublands. In the few areas where perennial streamflow
is available and terrain is relatively flat, land is irrigated  for crops.
     We perceived a difference in aquatic resource potential for  the most arid portions of the
region.   This resulted in delineation of a saltdesert subregion.  We were not able to explain the
distribution patterns in grassland and  shrubland communities using reference maps at this level
of resolution, so these were grouped into one subregion.  We also  had trouble understanding the
distribution of land use patterns within the ecoregion.  In the San Luis Valley, larger  tracts of
irrigated acreage occur adjacent to nonirrigated acreage, but we saw nothing on the rest of the
reference maps to explain the change in economic resource potential. Because of the likely effects
of irrigation on surface  and subsurface  water quality over such a large area, we needed  to
investigate related  environmental  factors on  a  finer scale  of  resolution to  understand the
distribution  of the different land uses.
      At a finer level of detail, it became evident that  only  the flattest areas are cultivated;
cropping stops when a certain degree of surface irregularity is  encountered.  This information is
evident from l:250,000-scale land use and topographic  maps  but not from  the smaller  scale,
 1:500,000 to 1:2,000,000 maps used for the rest of the regional assessment.  Although our intention
was to  delineate regional  subdivisions  based on mid-scale  resolution, we felt the need to identify
the irrigated cropland area as a separate subregion because  of the relatively extensive and intensive
 effects on water quality resources.  In this case, we purposely  deviated from our initial rules by
 examining maps  of a larger  scale than those used for other subregions.   We delineated  other,
 smaller irrigated cropland  areas throughout the  ecoregion in order to be  consistent  with this
 subregion class.   Our interpretation  of characteristics  in the  Arizona/New  Mexico Plateau
 Ecoregion led to the classification of three  subregions:
      a.
Shrublands of the Arizona/New Mexico Plateau Ecoregion (map unit #22-1)

1.   Climate - Semiarid.  230 to 450 mm of precipitation received annually.

2.   Physiography - Irregular plains, moderate to high relief plateaus,  and open, low
     mountains.  Local relief varies  from 30 m on irregular plains, to 300 m or  more
     near high tablelands.

3.   Land Use - Low density livestock grazing mostly for beef cattle and sheep.
                                               35

-------
     4.    Vegetation - Communities range from shrublands of big sagebrush, rabbitbrush,
          and winterfat to grasslands of western wheatgrass, green needlegrass, blue grama,
          and needle-and-thread.

     5.    Soils - Mostly Argids, also Psammaquents and Orthents.

     6.    Relative  Surface Water Quality  -  Surface water  resources  consist  mostly  of
          intermittent and  ephemeral streams.  A few  perennial  streams flow from  the
          nearby Southern Rockies.  Streams are impacted  by highly erodible sediments.

b.   Irrigated Flatlands of the Arizona/New Mexico Plateau Ecoregion (map unit #22-2)

     1.    Climate - Arid.  Receives 200 mm or less of annual precipitation.

     2.    Physiography - Flat to low relief plains. Local relief is a few meters or less.

     3.    Land Use - Irrigated agriculture.  Main  crops include barley, malt, alfalfa, small
          grains, hay, Irish potatoes, and a few other assorted vegetables.

     4.    Vegetation  -  Original shrublands were dominated  by  shadscale saltbush and
          greasewood.  Natural vegetation has  been removed for cropland acreage.

     5.    Soils - Mostly Argids, also Psammaquents and Orthents.

     6.    Relative  Surface Water Quality  -  Surface water  resources  consist  mostly  of
          intermittent and ephemeral streams.  Perennial flow occurs in a few large streams
          derived from the nearby  Southern  Rockies.  Streams  are impacted by  highly
          erodible  sediments,  water withdrawal, high salinity, especially from irrigation
          return  flow, and  runoff of farm chemicals in areas of irrigated agriculture.

c.   Saltdeserts of  the Arizona/New Mexico Plateau Ecoregion (map unit #22-3)

     1.    Climate - Arid.  Less than 250 mm annual precipitation.

     2.    Physiography - Irregular plains of  low to moderate  relief.   Local relief  varies
          accordingly, from several meters to  60 m.

     3.    Land Use - Low to very low density livestock grazing, mostly for beef cattle and
          sheep.
                                        36

-------
         4.   Vegetation -  Shrublands  dominated  by  shadscale  saltbush  and greasewood.
              Sagebrush, horsebrush,  spiny hopsage, rabbitbrush,  saltgrass, and  alkali sacaton
              also occur.

         5.   Soils - Mostly Argids, also Psammaquents and Orthents.

         6.   Relative  Surface  Water Quality  -  Surface  water  resources  consist mostly  of
              intermittent and ephemeral  streams.   A few  perennial streams flow from the
              nearby Southern Rockies.  Streams are impacted by highly erodible  sediments and
              high salinity.

2.4.2.9  Description of the Western High  Plains Ecoregion (#25)—

     The bulk of Colorado's cropland  is in the Western High Plains Ecoregion. Large tracts of
land are dry-farmed or irrigated for corn,  wheat,  sorghum, alfalfa, beans, sugar beets, onions, and
a  small variety  of other vegetables.   The semiarid climate supports  grassland communities,
providing range for beef cattle and sheep. Swine and poultry are also raised.  Population centers
occur along the foothills of the Rockies, on the western edge of the region, and along the South
Platte River.
     Most of the region  consists of smooth  to  irregular  plains;  local relief  varies from a few
meters  to  30 m.   Soils  have  been  formed from sedimentary materials and  are  predominantly
Mollisols, although  large areas of Entisols and Aridisols are distributed throughout the ecoregion.
Three hundred to 400 mm of precipitation falls annually, mainly during late spring through early
fall.  Surface waters are mostly intermittent and ephemeral streams.  Perennial streams, such as
the  Arkansas and  the Platte,  originate in the Southern  Rockies Ecoregion.  Where  available,
groundwater supplies are used for stock  watering ponds and irrigation.

2.4.2.10 Subregionalization of the Western High Plains Ecoregion—

      Reference maps indicate  that subregional patterns in this ecoregion are  primarily linked to
 local topography and type of surface  deposit.  Flat to gradual plains are cultivated, while areas
 of greater surface  irregularity are used as  range.  Sandy  loessal deposits consistently correspond
 with patterns of poorly developed soils,  sandhills grasses, and livestock grazing.   Regardless of
 terrestrial characteristics, locales having available surface or subsurface water supplies and minimal
 topographic relief are irrigated for crops.  Thus, irrigated agriculture is not indicative of particular
 climatic condition, substrate, vegetation,  or soil type; it is superimposed over  these characteristics
 whenever water is available.   Based on these observations,  we delineated three subregions:
                                               37

-------
a.    Rolling Sand Plains of the Western High Plains Ecoregion (map unit #25-1)

     1.    Climate - Semiarid.  200 to 300 mm of precipitation received  annually.

     2.    Physiography - Sandy rolling plains.  Local relief is often around 15 m.

     3.    Land  Use  - Rangeland.   Small plots  of  irrigated agriculture  are  scattered
          throughout the subregion where reliable groundwater supplies are available.

     4.    Vegetation - Sand reed, big and little bluestem, sand dropseed, and sand sage.

     5.    Soils - Ustic Torripsamments, formed from aeolian deposits.

     6.    Relative  Surface  Water  Quality - Few  surface water  drainages occur  in  this
          subregion, and these mainly are ephemeral.  Groundwater quality is affected by
          the leaching of farm chemicals.

b.    Moderate Relief Rangeland of the Western High Plains Ecoregion (map unit #25-2)

     1.    Climate - Semiarid.  200 to 300 mm of precipitation received  annually.

     2.    Physiography - Irregular plains.  Local relief is usually from  15 to 30  m, and
          sometimes 45 m.

     3.    Land Use - Rangeland.

     4.    Vegetation - Mainly blue grama, often occurring with western wheatgrass, galleta,
          alkali sacaton, and four-wing saltbush.

     5.    Soils - Ustolls and some Aridisols. Soils  have formed from sediments.

     6.    Relative Surface Water Quality - Surface  water resources are mainly intermittent
          and ephemeral streams. Exceptions include the Platte and Arkansas Rivers, which
          originate in the Southern Rockies Ecoregion.  Quality is  affected by stream bank
          and stream bed erosion due to highly credible soils and  trampling by cattle.
                                        38

-------
     c.    Flat to Rolling  Cropland of the Western High Plains Ecoregion (map unit #25-3)

          1.   Climate -  Semiarid.  200 to 300 mm precipitation received annually.

          2.   Physiography - Rolling plains.  Local  relief varies from a few to 15 m.

          3.   Land Use  -  Dryland crop agriculture.

          4.   Vegetation - Mainly blue grama, often  occurring with western wheatgrass, galleta,
              alkali sacaton, and four-wing saltbush.

          5.   Soils - Ustolls.

          6.   Relative Surface Water Quality - Surface water mainly  consists  of intermittent
              and ephemeral  streams  and ponds.  Perennial  streams originate  in  the Southern
              Rockies Ecoregion to the west. Quality of surface and subsurface water is affected
              by runoff and seepage of  farm chemicals,   diversion  of  stream  supplies  for
              irrigation, and  plowing of stream channels to improve field shape.  The  Platte
              River is particularly affected by severe water withdrawal, farm  chemicals, and
              munipical and industrial wastes.

2.4.2.11  Description of the Southwestern Tablelands Ecoregion (#26)—

     The semiarid Southwestern Tablelands are covered by grasslands, distinguishing  the ecoregion
from the  more arid shrublands of the other tableland regions.  The annual 250 to 500 mm of
precipitation maintains plant communities dominated throughout most of the area by blue grama
accompanied by western  wheatgrass, galleta, alkali sacaton, four-wing saltbush,  sand dropseed,
sandsage,  three-awn, bluestem sideoats, and grama.  Yucca, pinon pine, and juniper are scattered
in some areas.  Grasses provide a mainstay for the grazing of beef cattle.
     Topographic  relief is tens of meters on irregular plains; however, high  plateaus tower over
river valleys more than 300 meters below.  Soils receive meager inputs  of moisture and organic
materials and in many areas are subject to high rates  of alluvial and colluvial erosion. Aridisols
are  widely  distributed, and  Torriorthents  predominate where alluvial  and aeolian-deposited
materials have weathered in place.
     The  ecoregion contains mainly intermittent and  ephemeral streams.  The most conspicuous
surface water resources are the Arkansas  and Purgatoire  Rivers,  originating  from the  Rocky
Mountains to the west.  Unlike the steep-walled corridor of  the Purgatoire River,  the Arkansas
is  banked  by gradual to irregular topography on either  side.  Irrigated  agriculture occurs in
gradual terrain immediately adjacent to the  river.
                                             39

-------
2.4.2.12  Subregionalization of the Southwestern Tablelands Ecoregion—

     Inspection of reference maps for this ecoregion revealed conflicting distributional patterns
for environmental variables.  We examined maps of vegetation, soils, geology, topography, annual
precipitation,  land use, suggested land use treatment, rangeland potential, and several types of
published regional interpretations, yet found no clear relationships among mapped distributions
of these characteristics. Experience has shown us that this occurs when changes in environmental
features are too subtle to appear at our operational scale of resolution.   The one unique feature
was the irrigated agricultural corridor along portions of the Arkansas River.  This divergent land
use pattern was not reflected on any of the other reference maps.  Because the feature represented
only a narrow, discontinuous strip along the river, we elected not to distinguish it as  a separate
subregion. To sort out environmental variability in the Colorado portion of this ecoregion would
require examination of characteristics at a  finer resolution than that portrayed on the reference
maps used for this study.  Thus, the Colorado portion of the Southwestern Tablelands  Ecoregion
has been  recognized as representing only one subregion.   Were  we to  complete the delineation
process beyond the borders of the state, it is likely that additional subregions would be identified.

     a.   Grasslands of the Southwestern Tablelands Ecoregion (map unit #26-1)

          1.    Climate - Semiarid.  300 to 400 mm of precipitation is received annually. A large
               area in the west central portion of the subregion receives less than 300 mm.

          2.    Physiography - Irregular plains and tablelands of moderate local relief, generally
               ranging between  15  and 30 m.

          3.    Land  Use  - Rangeland.  An exception occurs  along the Arkansas River where
               perennial water supply and areas of flat terrain are used for irrigated agriculture.

          4.    Vegetation -  Mainly blue grama, often occurring with western wheatgrass, galleta,
               alkali sacaton, four-wing saltbush, sand dropseed, three-awn, sand reed, bluestem,
               sideoats grama, and yucca interspersed.

          5.    Soils - Ustollic Haplargids and Camborthids, and Ustic Torriorthents.

          6.    Relative Surface  Water Quality - Surface water resources are mainly intermittent
               and ephemeral streams.  Quality is  affected primarily  by rainwater  runoff on
               highly credible soils, and livestock trampling of stream banks and stream beds.
               The Arkansas River is affected by severe water withdrawal, runoff from farm
               chemicals,  and  municipal wastes.
                                             40

-------
2.5 SECTION SUMMARY

     In this section, we have examined the reasons behind the development of an environmental
regional framework by the U.S. EPA  Environmental Research Laboratory in Corvallis, Oregon.
We have also described the steps used in the general process of delineating regions.   Specific
examples  have been presented  to  demonstrate the rationale used to delineate  regions  at  two
different hierarchical levels.
     In Section 3, we introduce several components relating to  the evaluation of environmental
data within the organization of a regional framework.  The section covers various aspects within
the major topics of data sources, quality, and screening  procedures, and types of inventory  and
analyses that can be performed.  Examples from actual state research  projects are included.
                                             41

-------
                                        SECTION 3

               REGIONAL EVALUATION USING ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

3.1  INTRODUCTION

      A major assumption in using the ecoregion framework is  that it will improve our ability
to account  for  much of the spatial  variability in environmental  features.  To  evaluate  this
assumption,  we  analyzed  the  correspondence  between ecoregions and  spatial  patterns  in
physicochemical and biological components of stream ecosystems in  Arkansas, Ohio and Oregon.
In applying the framework for resource management or research, characterization of the regional
features is necessary for drawing  within-  and among-region conclusions  about the  condition of
resources.  To this end, we used environmental data from Colorado and Minnesota to demonstrate
methods to  characterize ecoregions.
      We draw on our experiences from these five state studies to present an overview of (1) data
sources for regional evaluations, (2) data requirements for effective regional analyses, (3) regional
sampling, (4) regional  analyses of  environmental data,  including examples of results for many of
the analyses, and (5)  screening and use of available data, including recent examples using data
from Colorado. All of our research relates to surface water chemistry and biological communities,
though we believe the regional approach is applicable to  other resources.

3.2  DATA SOURCES FOR REGIONAL EVALUATION

      One option  for  evaluating regional  patterns in  environmental variables is  to design  and
execute a research or monitoring program  tailored for regions and variables of interest, such as
selecting regional reference sites to characterize  attainable quality.   By attainable  we mean the
stream quality that could reasonably be achieved, as indicated by environmentally representative,
least human-impacted streams.    If we  could  isolate natural  regional characteristics,  regional
baseline conditions could be  measured.  But since  nearly all watersheds have some  degree of
human  influence, we can  measure  only  watersheds that are  least impacted, as our closest
approximation of undisturbed conditions.  We recognize that least impacted sites do not represent
undisturbed conditions, but rather provide the best information currently  available about such
conditions.  We can thus demonstrate a level of environmental quality that it should be possible
to attain  under current land use  conditions (Hughes et al. 1986; Hughes and  Larsen  1988).
Attaining quality surpassing this level  would require more drastic alteration in land  management
practices.
      In Ohio, for example, 107 minimally impacted streams in 5  ecoregions were sampled for
water chemistry (16 monthly samples),  fish  (3 times), macroinvertebrates (1 time with 2 methods),
and physical habitat (concurrent with biological sampling) (Larsen et al. 1986, 1988; Whittier et
                                            42

-------
al. 1987; Appendix B).  In Oregon, 99 minimally impacted streams in 8 ecoregions were sampled
once  for fish, macroinvertebrate and periphyton assemblages, water chemistry,  and physical
habitat (Whittier  et al.  1988).  In Arkansas, 37 stream sites  in 6 ecoregions were sampled twice
for fish, benthos, water chemistry, physical habitat, and flow data (Bennett et al. 1987;  Giese et
al.  1987; Rohm  et al.  1987; Appendix B).   Such surveys  should  assure thorough  geographic
coverage, consistent  sampling, conscientious  quality  assurance/quality  control  (QA/QC), and
optimum choice of variables and quality data.  We estimate  that these surveys require a two- to
four-year commitment  for planning, organization, and execution of the sampling,  and for data
analysis.
      Another approach to evaluating regional environmental  patterns is to  use data  available
from a  variety of sources.  Examples include  data bases from (1) Oregon, where fish collection
data from 1,300  sites were evaluated for regional patterns (Hughes et al. 1987), (2)  Minnesota,
where data from approximately  1,100 lakes,  collected over 6 years by several agencies  were
analyzed for total phosphorus and Secchi disk  transparency in order to examine regional patterns
in lake trophic state (Heiskary et al. 1987), and (3) Colorado, where water chemistry data (mostly
from the U.S. EPA's STORET data base) and fish community data (from the state's Division of
Wildlife and a variety of special studies and summaries) were analyzed for regional patterns.
      Existing data offer several potential advantages, such as possible large numbers of sites and
samples, historical perspective, great diversity of variables,  relatively low costs (usually only to
access a data base or transfer files, and to analyze the data), and short turnaround  time between
research design and data acquisition. There are also several  serious limitations to consider before
using available data  for regional analyses:   data quality  assurance  may be lacking  or unknown,
distribution of sampling sites and times may  be inadequate or inappropriate, samples may have
been collected for a wide variety of purposes using several potentially incompatible sampling and
analytical methods, and sites may lack complete sets of variables.  Thus, available  data must be
used with great caution and skepticism.  One purpose of analyzing existing data for  Colorado was
to test the usability of available data to assess and characterize regional  patterns.  Many of the
results presented in the discussion on available data are from this  project, and serve as examples
of the  kinds of  issues that occurred, the  methodology developed  to deal with them, and the
outcomes of this methodology.

3.3  DATA  REQUIREMENTS

      In order for environmental data to be most useful, several conditions should be met, whether
sampling is to be specifically designed for regional analyses, or data are obtained  from existing
sources.  These conditions relate to geographic coverage of sites  (distribution, number,  levels of
human  induced  impacts,  and representativeness), the completeness of data (kinds of data and
appropriateness  of sampling), and data quality (of sampling and analyses).  The importance of
these factors varies,  depending upon the  purposes of the  study.  In many cases it will not be
                                              43

-------
possible to  fully meet the  ideal conditions; thus, in the  following discussion,  the  phrase  to the
greatest extent possible applies to each consideration.

3.3.1   Geographic Coverage

      To characterize the environmental variables in a region, sampling sites should be spatially
well distributed. Unless a high degree of statistical precision is desired, it is usually  not necessary
nor possible that an area be sampled at regular,  or perfectly random, intervals. However, large
areas devoid of sampling sites may not be sufficiently represented in the data set. Such cases may
be unavoidable where the resource of interest is relatively  rare, such as perennial streams in  desert
regions.  Sites also should not be clumped in only a few portions of a region.  Otherwise, data
from a  limited set  of regional  environmental conditions may be inappropriately  construed to
represent conditions over the entire  region.
      The ideal number of  sites per region is a function of the natural variability in the area and
the precision with which estimates  are desired.   Relatively small and/or homogeneous regions
require fewer sites than large and/or naturally heterogeneous areas.   Rigorous hypothesis testing
and sampling for regulatory or  litigation purposes require more sites than exploratory, baseline
surveys.  As the quality of,  or confidence in, the  data  decreases,  the number of sites needed
increases.  As few as six well chosen sites per region, with good quality assurance and quality
control of sampling and analyses, may suffice to establish regional baseline data.
      It is important to assess the level of human induced impacts on the environmental variables
being studied.  One of the major purposes of using an ecological regional framework is to stratify
sampling to account  for variability  (noise) due  to  naturally  occurring ecological differences.
Human effects usually produce an additional level of data noise, potentially masking  the natural
regional differences.   Thus if the data are  to demonstrate attainable  quality of relatively natural
conditions, it is important that regional reference sites be  as unimpacted as possible, though most
regions have few, if any, pristine sites (Hughes et al. 1986).  If the sampling is to demonstrate the
range  of anthropogenic  impacts on  natural regional conditions, then sites  must  be classified
according to  type and intensity of  impact.  This stratification of  disturbance is  necessary to
confirm representation of the entire  range  of conditions.  It cannot be assumed that just because
a data  base is  large, a  complete range of impacts is represented.   For  instance,  most large
government data bases emphasize areas of known impact, and most academic data are derived
from studies avoiding impacted  areas.
      Sites selected for analysis of regional  characteristics or potentials must also be representative
of their regions, otherwise, the search for least impacted sites may lead to anomalous  areas. For
example, in a region characterized  by  deep soils and agricultural  land use,  an area of  rocky
outcrops may be left  undisturbed (meeting the minimally impacted  criterion)  but  could not be
considered typical of the region. So  considerations of least impacted  and representative are often
in conflict.   Prior to site selection, it is necessary to understand the  ecological characteristics of
                                             44

-------
the regions and the occurrences of the features related to the environmental variables of interest.
For example, in a study of lake trophic levels, if deep lakes are rare in a particular region, then
it may be appropriate to  either exclude them  from the sampling or analyze them as a separate
class.

3.3.2  Data Completeness

      The kinds  of data used in regional studies,  their completeness, and their appropriateness
are complex issues. The kinds of data needed for regional analyses vary with the complexity and
scope of the project, and the amount of statistical sophistication and computerization intended.
Many data requirements should be automatically met when a project includes its own sampling
program.  These needs can be scaled back for less complex projects, but should still be evaluated
relative to overall goals.
      Data completeness for regional analyses includes two components: the spatial representation
of environmental conditions and the environmental variables sampled. Our general  discussion of
these issues is directed toward more  complex  data needs, assuming access to computerized data
bases, statistical packages, and Geographic Information System (GIS) technology.  Examples related
to water chemistry and aquatic biology sampling are included.
      Good locational data are essential for programs examining spatial patterns.  If  GIS mapping
is  used, sampling stations must have locations in  one  of three coordinate systems:  (1) degrees,
minutes, and seconds, (2) decimal degrees, or (3) Universal Transverse Mercator.  In many parts
of the country, and in many data bases, locations are in township, range,  and section format.
These data are not amenable to automated conversion to latitude/longitude coordinates, and must
be approximately located  on a map and converted by  hand.
      The following geographic information should be included in either the sampling site data
or the GIS  coverages, or both:  (1)  political  location, such as  state and county (a number of
assessments  have used counties as their spatial framework), (2)  the name of the water body, (3)
the  hydrographic unit (similar to river basins; the units have been used  in  many research,
monitoring and regulation programs), (4) the ecoregion (subregion may also be useful), and (5) a
narrative site location description (clear enough for another person to locate the site on a map).
There is also a variety of useful geographic information that could be included as independent
variables, either  as maps  or as GIS coverages. These  might consist of state designated uses of
surface waters, locations  of known point and  nonpoint sources  of impact, land use, and natural
limiting factors,  such as saline aquifers.  These coverages would be valuable as overlays during
the evaluation of regional patterns of dependent variables such as stream water chemistry or biotic
assemblages.
      It is important that environmental data collection be as complete as possible.   Using stream
water  chemistry  as an example,  the following information should be available for each station:
(1) the concentration of  each chemical, (2) the  number,  date, and in some cases,  time when
                                             45

-------
samples were obtained, (3) the sampling and analytical methods used, (4) the flow rate (stream
discharge) at each sample  time, and (5)  if possible, the purpose of the sampling (e.g., long-term
monitoring, permit  compliance).   This additional  information aids  in  the  assessment of data
completeness, appropriateness, and comparability among sites.
      Likewise,  complete  stream  biological  data  should  include  both  fish  and  benthic
macroinvertebrate collections, possibly augmented with periphyton (algae) and microinvertebrate
collections.   Biological data should also have supplemental  information  for each survey (list of
sites), such as the person or agency responsible for the data, the  purpose of the collection (e.g.,
for sport  fish only, or selected families), the collection methods and dates, the quantitative or
qualitative nature of the data, the level of taxonomic resolution for the specimens identified, and,
for each site, the size of the  area sampled and a description of the physical habitat conditions.
Additional materials should  be  included about  the  species  collected in order to  extend the
assessments.  For example,  description of the natural history, tolerance to perturbation (e.g., low
dissolved oxygen, siltation), historical range, and possible stocking programs and introductions are
useful in assessing the biotic  health of a stream.
      The appropriateness of environmental data for regional analyses is an issue when evaluating
existing data, and should be emphasized during design of a regional sampling program and training
of field crews. For example,  if fish communities are to be sampled, it is important to emphasize
that equal sampling effort must be directed toward all probable species, rather than toward sport
fish.  Similarly, if regional patterns in  lake phosphorus are  of interest, and one sample per lake
is  planned, then project objectives should dictate  whether sampling is more appropriate during
spring or  fall turnover of nutrients, when  the waters are well mixed, or during summer,  when
problem conditions are most likely.

3.3.3  Data Quality

      Overall, data quality is receiving increased attention, especially as environmental, technical,
legal, and fiscal issues become more complex.  To be most effective, data should  be of known
quality.  This can be achieved by establishing a quality assurance (QA) program for each project.
The QA program begins by setting specific data quality objectives during the design phase of the
project, which focuses attention on the levels of accuracy and precision needed and  the trade-
offs with cost.  The QA  program documents  the  quality control  (QC) procedures  to be  used
throughout all phases of data collection and analysis, including  but not limited  to, sampling
methods, sample preparation  and handling, laboratory methods (such as  instrument calibration),
duplicate and blank samples, and data entry. The QA plan should also include a statistically valid
sampling design, as well as information  on field crew training, equipment logistics, and methods
for evaluating the results  of the  QC  procedures.  The overall  program of QA  and its  QC
procedures is often called QA/QC.  Our  experience indicates  that data from existing  sources often
require considerable evaluation to determine the degree of quality and the appropriateness towards
                                             46

-------
an intended use.  Lack of consistent QA/QC during the transfer of field and laboratory data to
computerized data bases  is also a major impediment to using existing data bases.   Screening of
data is discussed in Section 3.6.

3.4  REGIONAL SAMPLING

      A compromise  between the cost  of a project and the completeness  of the  data  obtained
occurs in all sampling programs.  For water chemistry, the costs usually are related to the number
of samples  taken,  and  the  number  and complexity  of laboratory  analyses performed.   For
biological assemblages, costs relate to number of species and individuals collected and identified
per sampling effort.  The  major expense for collecting fish assemblages is  the sampling crew;
usually a two- to three-person crew can sample one or two small stream sites or six to eight boat
sampling sites per day.  For benthos, one person can sample a site in about two hours; however,
laboratory sorting  and identification of the specimens can take several hours to several  days per
sample, depending upon  the  complexity of fauna and the level of resolution required.
      Regional patterns in water chemistry may be portrayed as a snapshot of conditions during
one season of a year,  if based on single  samples taken over a brief sampling period.  For streams,
conditions are usually most stable during summer  low flows.  Often, under  these circumstances,
water  temperatures and  concentrations  of potentially detrimental chemicals are  highest and the
ecosystem is most stressed.  For lakes, the most  stable conditions  occur during  spring or fall
turnover,  when stratification breaks up and the waters are  well  mixed.   The  most stressed
conditions occur just  before spring or fall turnover, when hypolimnion oxygen concentrations are
lowest. For the purpose of measuring the relationship between algal blooms and total phosphorus,
lakes  may be  best sampled during  summer.   A snapshot approach  of  a  single, one-season
measurement of surface  water quality was used in evaluating the ecoregions  of Arkansas (Rohm
et al.  1987) and Oregon  (Whittier et al. 1988).
       Long-term monitoring  obviously costs more than one-time sampling, but provides a far more
complete evaluation of regional  conditions.  Monthly stream sampling demonstrates the range of
measurement values to be expected, as well as the seasonal patterns and stress periods. An average
monthly or seasonal value calculated over several samples reduces the influence of unusual events,
producing  a more accurate assessment of site conditions.
       The sampling  needs  for  aquatic biology  are somewhat more complex  than for water
chemistry.   Each  biotic group (fishes, benthic  macroinvertebrates,  periphyton,  and micro-
invertebrates) has  different sampling and analysis protocols.  The following paragraphs present an
overview of some sampling issues for the two most commonly sampled aquatic life forms, fish and
benthic  macroinvertebrates  (benthos)  in  small  streams.    Sampling concerns  are related  to
seasonality, completeness of sampling, and level of taxonomic resolution. The latter two are level
of effort issues.
                                             47

-------
      Aquatic organisms cannot be sampled with equal accuracy during all seasons of the year.
For fish, mid or late summer to early fall is often the best period for sampling.  At other times,
the variability increases due to seasonal migrations or large numbers of young of the year fish.
In addition, high flows during other seasons make the sampling difficult, if not dangerous.  For
benthos, the  best time to sample  is when most  of the  organisms have matured enough to be
identified taxonomically, but not so late that the insects have emerged.  In benthic  communities,
the species assemblages that are collectable and identifiable change throughout the year; therefore,
it is important to sample at a consistent season in each region.
      There  is increasing evidence that,  for  most monitoring purposes, it is not necessary to
perform a complete inventory (i.e., collect every individual) of fish assemblages, nor identify every
benthic specimen to the species level.  For example, ordinations of the benthic assemblages in the
Oregon study showed similar regional patterns at the family, genus, and species level of taxonomic
resolution (Whittier et al. 1988).  Likewise,  for purposes of characterizing regional biological
assemblages,  one or two collections taken annually during the optimum sampling season might be
sufficient.  In the Ohio study, reference sites were sampled for fish three times over one summer.
When these data  were ordinated using detrended correspondence analysis, the three samples from
each site usually  had each other as  their nearest neighbors when axes I and II scores were plotted
(Whittier and Rohm, unpublished data). That  is,  no major changes in fish assemblages occurred
over the sampling season, and thus any one sample was representative of that site.  Disturbed sites,
however, have greater variance (Karr et al. 1986).
      Whatever biological groups are sampled, it  is important to sample for (collect, count,  and
identify) all  subgroups whenever possible.  As a counter-example, many fish  collections have
concentrated on,  or reported, only sport fish. This practice provides an incomplete, biased picture
of the whole community. If possible, all aquatic habitats should be sampled at a site,  and an
overall  assessment  of the watershed,  stream,  or  lake physical habitat  should be made to  help
evaluate the  representativeness of the  site  and  its  biological  assemblage(s).   Examples  of
appropriate sampling protocols are those of Arkansas (Bennett et al. 1987; Giese et al. 1987), Ohio
(Ohio Environmental Protection Agency 1987a,  1987b,  1987c), or the  Rapid Bioassessment
Protocols of the U.S. EPA (Plafkin  et al. 1989).

3.5 REGIONAL DATA ANALYSIS
      In the early stages  of regional assessments (e.g.,  evaluation of  correspondence between
ecoregions and spatial patterns of ecosystems or selected environmental variables), data analyses
are of a particularly exploratory nature.  The emphasis is on developing a picture of the spatial
patterns in the data to establish a baseline or range of conditions that  characterize  the  regions.
Because this kind  of evaluation  is not  done in most areas, baseline  conditions are probably
unknown.  If available data are being used, it may not be known whether the data are worthwhile.
This analytical process is nonlinear and often iterative, requiring creativity along with objectivity,
so as not to bias the analyses by recognizing  only results or data showing desired patterns.

                                             48

-------
      We employ a variety of  data  analyses and  presentation techniques,  primarily  dot  maps,
boxplots, ordinations (e.g., principal components analysis, detrended correspondence analysis), and
species signatures (profiles).  These analyses are somewhat redundant, but each provides another
way of demonstrating and assessing regional patterns in the data.  The visual displays resulting
from these techniques are more  quickly and completely comprehended than tabular presentations.

3.5.1  Water Chemistry Analysis

      Univariate analysis of water chemistry data should be the first step in regional  assessment
of water chemistry.  This allows us to develop an understanding of the components before moving
on to more sophisticated procedures.  At each site, a value is determined to represent that location
for each chemical or physical variable.  For data from one-time sampling, that value  is obvious.
For multiple sample programs, the median site value for each variable is preferred over the mean,
because the median is less influenced by a few extreme values than is the mean.  It is  also  useful
to determine seasonal median values  (e.g., summer or low flow vs. all year).
      We use dot maps to  portray spatial patterns of  individual chemical variables  across the
regions being studied. An effective way is to draft a map, with outlined circles at each sampling
location (we call these dot maps), to serve as a template for duplication.  For each variable, the
range of values  is examined and partitioned  into from 2 to 10 groups or classes.  These divisions
may be based on a variety of criteria, for example, presence or absence of  values above a given
standard, commonly used classes, such as lake trophic state, or equal-sized groups.  The number
of classes depends on the purpose of the study and the  level of resolution desired.  We find that
six to nine classes provide good resolution for many purposes; fewer classes  may  limit  the ability
to perceive gradations in the patterns of the data; the use of more classes is restricted  by our
inability to portray and instantly discern a larger range of symbols or colors.
      We prefer to produce a map for each variable by coloring in the circles with a progression
of hues, usually lighter  to darker, to  indicate classes of increasing data values.  However, since
publishing in color is  expensive,  some alternatives are to use  a  set of symbols, sequence of
numerals, or progression of grey tones.  Figure 3-1 shows median stream concentrations of total
phosphorus in Ohio's regional reference sites. This figure depicts regional  patterns in a manner
that can be quickly and clearly  comprehended.  Patterns of the spatial distribution of  the classes
can be compared with patterns  of other environmental variables,  such as soils, geology, and land
use, to  determine  apparent associations.   Generalizations  can  be  made  concerning  which
environmental characteristics  are common among the data points for a  particular map class.
      Another univariate tool with which to begin quantifying regional patterns is the boxplot
(e.g., Figure 3-2).  Boxplots display the central measures of concentrations  for each variable for
each region. These measures  can include the average (median, mean, or both) and central ranges
where most values fall, the interquartile range, and sometimes the standard deviation or standard
error.  Boxplots may show additional information about the distribution of values,  such  as the 10th
                                             49

-------
        Eastern Corn
         Beit Plains
                    Huron/
                      Erie
                      Lake
                      Plain
                                           Lake Plain
                                             O  Western
                                                Allegheny
                                                 Plateau
                                                o
                                              00°°
       Interior
       Plateau
       Total
   Phosphorus
      (mg/L)

        O <0.050
0.050 < H < 0.075
0.075< ® <0.100
0.100< 0 < 0.200
0.200 < 0
Figure 3-1.    Spatial patterns of total phosphorus in Ohio streams.  Values are site medians of

             monthly samples taken over a 16-month period (Larsen et al. 1988; Whittier et al.

             1987).
                                     50

-------
— 0.5-
o>
E 0.4-
2 0.3 -
o

Q_
v> o.2-
o
.c
Q.
O
•*—
O
r C\
A 2.0-,
I 1 ^ -
i "5:








1
1 <»
o>
o 1.0-
^~
—
rl
• rt —
jin •«= 05-
Jufl s 1 | '-
0 I III w
8
3
o>
E. 6-
c
CD
CT
2 4-
z
1
Q} p 	
pi
0.16-1
n H






a>
^E 0.12-
M S '
C3>
J L 2 0.08-
i
-r ^ 0.04-
VJl Q 'Z
U ° 0 ^ .

4






T rn — 90 	 1
II i-1 "-1-75 »
S 1 1 c
f «--Median |
T H rJ-25 £
T T — 10 —
1 	 1
1 Relative
1 1 1 Sample Size
J 1
r n n
. J L i
• r.n i
5 n

ii i i i

1





[

i
A x
J L x
, IJ g ,

U III w 1 1 1 1
Ij
o> 0.30 -
E
— _
c
o>
°" O.20 -
o
._
Z
1
.E 0.10-
c
o
E
E
< 0-
-J 12-











I ^ 10~

c
5 8-
T~
O
0 6-
_ o
ic .
o 4-
5>
i-
.1 o 2_
a
O r^
T







1 1
T n
-L J L
, n r

.
J L s
j1 r.i D r
" I "i f Q 1

1 -L 1 I
l~^ 1 *


II h- 0 1 1 I I
,  3 >i
.a: "35 -* 0 C J<:  R m o  „. c ^ — c" _,
^ctm0 Q_a)rj     £  tj
                        x   a    •;:        a>
                            UJ    LU        §
Figure 3-2.     Selected nutrient measures of water quality in Ohio ecoregions.  Boxplots are of


                site medians of 16 monthly samples (Larsen et al. 1988; Whittier et al. 1987).



                                              51

-------
 and 90th percentiles, the minimum and maximum values, outliers beyond some confidence limits,
 and the relative sample size. Usually, for a particular variable, all regional boxes are drawn on
 the same figure to facilitate comparisons among regions.
      Figure 3-2a is the boxplot display of the same data shown in the previous figure.  This
 data presentation begins to quantify the regional characteristics of variables and indicates the level
 to which the regions account  for spatial variation.   Dot maps tend to  emphasize the regions
 dominated by either high or low values.   Boxplots show this,  but also bring  out the relationships
 among  the intermediate or transitional regions and  those with  a  high degree of  variability.
 Boxplots display enough of  the information contained in data frequency curves to also indicate
 distortions in the  distribution  of values.  The basic  information in the plots  may be  easily
 extracted into tabular form.
      Concentrations of many chemical variables are often moderately well correlated, thus regions
 with  high values in one variable  tend to have high values in  most  of the others.   To aid
 interpretation of the regional patterns, it is useful to arrange the regional boxplots in order from
 high to low concentrations and to group plots of several related chemical variables into one  figure.
 For  example, Figure  3-2 shows  the boxplots for six nutrient enrichment variables  in  Ohio's
 reference streams.  This grouping of plots displays the consistent regional  pattern commonly found
 across variables, with  a slight variation for  total organic carbon.
      When  water  chemistry data are taken from regional reference sites, as in  these examples,
 boxplots are  useful for displaying regionally attainable conditions.  Because  the sites are located
 in representative,  minimally impacted watersheds, they  portray water chemistry  that should be
 achievable given current land use practices  and natural ecological conditions.  For instance, the
 upper quartile limit (75th percentile) might be chosen as the  regional goal.  Thus,  according to
 Figure 3-2, regional criteria levels for total  phosphorus in Ohio's streams could be 0.30 mg/L in
 the  Huron/Erie Lake  Plain Ecoregion,  0.12 in the  Eastern  Corn Belt Plains,  0.10  in the
 Erie/Ontario Lake  Plain and the Interior  Plateau, and  0.05 in the Western Allegheny  Plateau.
      There  are also methods for examining the regional patterns in several variables at once. For
 water  chemistry,  principal  component  analysis (PCA) is probably the  most  useful  of the
 multivariate  analyses.  PCA  is an ordination technique that can collapse a set of correlated data
 into  one or a few variables (principal components) that account for most of the variability in a
set of multivariate correlated  data (SAS  Institute, Inc.  1985).  Thus, if the  concentrations of
chemicals shown in Figure 3-2 are as correlated as they appear to be, then a  PCA could generate
one composite variable to represent most of the variability in the six nutrient variables.  Because
the PCA is  designed for normally distributed  data,  the  chemical data in  Figure  3-2 were
transformed  using a log (x+1) transformation to achieve  a more normal  distribution.
      There  may be a temptation to  analyze all chemical variables in one large PCA.  However,
if different groups  of variables  have  different environmental sources, it is useful to analyze them
separately. For example, the nutrient enrichment chemicals  mostly had human origins, while the
ionic strength measures (e.g., conductivity, alkalinity, hardness) were generally derived from soil,
                                             52

-------
bedrock, and  sometimes aquifers.  When we subjected these nutrient data to a PCA, the first
principal component (PCA I) accounted  for 64% of  the  data variability.  The PCA  I  scores
corresponded to increasing concentrations for all variables. The second principal component (PCA
II) accounted for an additional 14% of the variability, and reflected the dominance of total organic
carbon. The PCA I seemed to express the overall quality of nutrient richness of the stream  water.
The ionic strength  measures were more highly correlated than the nutrient enrichment variables.
As a result, the ionic strength PCA I accounted for  90% of the variability.
      The results of the two  principal component analyses can be summarized as a graph  of the
PCA I for nutrient richness versus the PCA I for ionic strength (Figure 3-3).  Sites having similar
PCA scores, those close to each other on Figure 3-3, have similar chemical concentrations. This
graph  shows a clear relationship between the water  chemistry of the sites and their ecoregions.
Sites in the Western Allegheny Plateau are clustered in the area of low nutrient richness and low
to intermediate ionic strength. Sites in the Interior Plateau form a close group, with intermediate
values for both groups of variables.  Sites from the  Erie/Ontario Lake Plain are more scattered
and encompass those of the Interior Plateau. Sites in the Eastern Corn Belt Plains have the highest
overall ionic strength, while the Huron/Erie Lake Plain sites have the highest nutrient richness.
      Each of the Ohio regions could be distinguished  by a combination of nutrient richness and
ionic  strength variables.  Groupings that define  attainable water chemistry in minimally impacted
streams of each ecoregion can be indicated by the enclosed areas in Figure 3-3. These areas have
been  subjectively  circumscribed to indicate the general regional  water chemistry.  Although not
all sites fit this general pattern,  regional differences are  evident.

3.5.2   Analysis of Aquatic  Biota

      With biological data it may be  less important to perform strictly univariate analyses  before
multivariate  data analyses.   That is,  it  may  be most  valuable to run  a number  of species
ordinations initially to obtain a sense of  the overall regional patterns,  prior to calculating regional
indices.  To organize our discussion, we present  methods of univariate analyses first.  Any analysis
that produces a single value  per site can be plotted onto a dot map and presented in regional
boxplots to display regional  patterns in biological assemblage measures, as  discussed for water
chemistry data. However, for data from small streams, index values may also be affected  by the
stream size, so two other techniques  are reviewed here:  regressions  and boxplots of residuals.
       Regional assessments of biological  data  should  include  any of a number of indices that
measure the  health or integrity of  the biological communities.  These  indices  are somewhat
multivariate because they include information from several variables in the calculations. However,
the indices  usually produce a single number for each site and most of the calculations can  be
performed on a handheld calculator.  The following examples of biological indices are drawn from
stream fish  community analyses,  but  the principles  on which they are built apply  to other
organism groups.
                                             53

-------
     5-


     4-


     3-


~   2-

O
^   H
  c   OH
  Q)
  O
  c
  o
     -2-


     -3-


     -4-
                             \
              1
                   \
                                     0
                                     °
    \




 /  n

/   DC

         I    u D I '   V    /


         iVf"   D/
         '    rr-l   \    ^   /
         %    LJQ   i1   ^^  y

          \  D   /D  ~~-^
             -2
                  -1
~T~
 0
                                                                                 \
                                •  Huron/Erie Lake Plain
                                o  Eastern Corn  Belt Plains
                                v  Erie/Ontario  Lake Plain
                                A  Interior Plateau
                                n  Western Allegheny Plateau
  I       i	1	1	1	
  12345

Nutrient Richness  (PCA  1)
                                                     1
                                                     6
                                                                      7
                                                                           8
Figure 3-3.    Regional patterns in nutrient richness and ionic strength variables measured in Ohio
              streams, as indicated by principal component analysis axis I scores for each. Areas
              enclosed indicate hypothesized attainable  water quality for each Ohio ecoregion
              (Larsen et al 1988; Whittier et al. 1987).
                                         54

-------
      Species richness (the number of different species) is a simple and direct measure of the
variety of species present  in a community.  If exotic (non-native) species are excluded, greater
species richness indicates better ecosystem health, in most ecoregions.  In general, species richness
in small- to medium-sized streams increases as stream size increases.  Because of this relationship,
dot maps and boxplots of the raw species richness values for Ohio data would include variability
attributed to this  source. Therefore, we regressed species richness on watershed area, as a measure
of stream size (Hughes  and Omernik 1983),  then examined residuals  from this relationship for
regional patterns.  This analysis (Figure  3-4) shows that for watersheds of similar size, species
richness tends to be lowest in the Huron/Erie Lake Plain and  highest in the  Western Allegheny
Plateau.
      As with any of these analyses, regressing an index value against another variable must make
ecological sense  if it is to be useful.  For example, in Ohio,  rainfall and  runoff patterns are
relatively similar statewide, but in Oregon, annual rainfall varies from less than 250 mm to greater
than 2,500 mm across the state.  Thus, watershed size is a  better estimate of relative stream size
in Ohio than in Oregon.
      Species diversity is a commonly used community  index that combines species richness and
equitability, the relative abundance of species.  This index was linearly related to watershed area
in the Ohio study.  There is growing evidence that species diversity is not particularly meaningful
as a community  index, despite its popularity (e.g., Hurlbert 1971; Washington 1984).
      For  fish communities, especially in larger streams and  rivers,  Gammon's Index of Well
Being (IWB) is a useful measure of biological health.  The IWB combines measures of abundance
and biomass, and the diversity of the two.   This index appears to reflect environmental quality
more satisfactorily than does species diversity alone  (Gammon  1976, 1980; Hughes and Gammon
1987). In Ohio's streams,  there is a slight but significant relationship between stream size and the
IWB.
      Other measures of the health of an ecosystem include the number of species and the fraction
of individuals in the community that are generally intolerant of environmental degradation.   In
streams, intolerant species are generally those requiring high levels of dissolved oxygen and low
levels of turbidity and siltation.  In the Ohio study,  all of these indices of community health
(diversity, IWB, percent intolerant individuals, and number  of intolerant species) showed regional
patterns similar to those seen for species richness.
      Recently,  another measure of community health, the Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI), was
developed for streams in the Midwest (Karr 1981).  The IBI sums the values of  12 individual
metrics that  evaluate different  facets of the community structure related to ecosystem  health.
Essentially,  the IBI quantifies the  kinds of  judgment that a professional biologist would make
when assessing the health of streams in a particular region.  The IBI is considered to be more
robust than any  single measure we  have discussed (Karr et  al. 1986; Miller et al. 1988; Plafkin et
al. 1989).  The concept and process can be transferred to other organism groups, ecosystems, and
regions (Miller et al. 1988; Hughes and Gammon 1987). In Ohio, the  IBI  scores (Figure 3-5)
follow the  same regional  patterns as the other indices discussed earlier in this  subsection.

                                              55

-------
                    40-i
                 53  34
                .a
                 E


                J  28

                 OT
                -E  22
                 o
                 _ -- o





1



f
J






en
c
uj5 0-5





n


r
U


i
^
D
	 1

O
"l- C
•2'a
I 1 ^
0)
en
c
a
no:
1^
I • Rel




~t?5
1


A _ 	 Mar
w IVI c C
J-25
f-1°
	 1
ative
Sample Size







3 >.
0 C
Q) 0)
•*- s:
— ** 3

— D
S 52












Figure 3-4.     Fish species richness of streams in Ohio ecoregions.  (A) Regression of maximum

               fish species richness at each site vs. Iog10 watershed area:  1 = Huron/Erie Lake

               Plain, 2 = Eastern Corn Belt  Plains,  3 = Erie/Ontario Lake Plain,  4 = Interior

               Plateau, 5 = Western Allegheny Plateau. (B) Boxplots of the residuals of the species

               richness regression by region (Whittier et al. 1987).
                                           56

-------
          a>
                                                       
                                                       c
                                                       o
                                                       a:
                                                      1
                                                    — 90	

                                                     -75



                                                     -Median
             JS

             c
i  r~25
 M—10
                                                             

            — o
                                         DO
                                         UJ

                                         d
                                                                      CD
                                                                      QJ
Figure 3-5.     Boxplots of the site maximum Index of Biotic Integrity scores for regional reference

               sites in Ohio ecoregions. Qualitative evaluations from Karr (1981) (Whittier et al.

               1987).
                                           57

-------
      Another regional feature of biological communities is the distribution  and dominance of
species or families.  One approach to assessing this  feature is to produce dot maps of the sites
where individual species occur or where they dominate the assemblage.  However, in cases where
there are  large numbers of  species,  the number of  maps proliferates quickly.  This species
distribution information can  be succinctly  presented  as species signatures.   These figures are
analogous  to  the pollen diagrams used by  paleobotanists to display  changes in vegetation
communities over long periods of time.  In  this case, the figures display  regional differences in
the biological communities  expected in relatively  unimpacted streams.
      Regional patterns in the common organisms may be displayed by frequency of occurrence,
by dominance, and by relative abundance.  For these methods, there must be some way to select
the species or families to  be included.   In  the Ohio study, for the  relative  abundance species
signature,  those species that had a mean  relative abundance of at least 2% in at least one region
were included (Figure 3-6). For the dominant species signature, dominance was defined as greater
than 10% of a sample (Figure 3-7). These figures show that two species,  bluntnose minnow and
creek chub, are ubiquitous  and usually dominant in small Ohio streams in all regions.  However,
there are clear regional patterns for the other commonly collected fish. In areas with few species
(e.g., the western states), the frequency of occurrence (percentage of sites where a species occurs)
may be the best method to display  regional  patterns of species.
      Biological  data  can  also  be subjected to  multivariate  analyses  to  show  the overall
relationships among sites based on  their species composition.  Various cluster analyses may be
used, but  these rarely, if ever,  produce neat  regional clusters, and so may distract from the
assessment of regional patterns.  Ordination scores  can be used to  plot,  in two or three dimensions,
the relative locations of sites in species  space. Thus, ordinations can show the overall pattern
without including the statistically imposed breaks  seen  in cluster analyses.  Principal components
analysis ordination can be used with biological data, but because of  the  nonlinearity of species
data, most biological data suffer two separate distortions during this process. Reciprocal averaging
and  detrended correspondence analysis mathematically remove most of this distortion,  with the
latter performing somewhat better (Gauch 1982).
      There are a number of data transformations that should be explored during ordination of
biological  data.   Of course, raw abundance data can be used,  but if counts vary over several
orders  of magnitude, the ordination scores on the first few  axes may be dominated by the high
abundance of one or two species.  In this case, a log (x+1)  transformation of the counts should
be tried.  The presence/absence form  of  the data  is often useful, but  collections with many rare
species may also produce distorted results. Ordinations may also be run on biological data grouped
by family  or genus. In any case, the  results of the ordinations should be carefully examined to
determine  whether they make ecological and biological sense. Figure  3-8  is a plot of axes  1  and
2 detrended correspondence analysis scores for presence/absence data for fish from the Oregon
study.  Axis 1  separates the mountainous ecoregions from the nonmontane ecoregions. The second
axis  generally separates the three nonmontane ecoregions from each other.
                                             58

-------
T
[1
^
V
Huron/Erie Lake Plain
ii, !
T T °
1 1
1/liT.llTlulwMulM . — . — . — . — . — , — , — . — ,_

-TL-75 «
•--Median g
sicrMve
          1  23456789
                     Eastern Corn Belt Plains
                                                             1 Bluntnose Minnow
                                                             2 Creek Chub
                                                             3 Green Sunf ish
                                                             4 Johnny  Darter
                                                             5 Blackstripe Topminnow
                                                             6 White Sucker
                                                             7 Yellow Bullhead
                                                             8 Fathead Minnow
                                                             9 Common Carp
                                                            1O Greenside Darter
                                                            11 Rosefin Shiner
                                                            12 Gizzard Shad
                                                                             13 Emerald Shiner
                                                                             14 Rainbow Darter
                                                                             15 Spotfin Shiner
                                                                             16 Spotted Bass
                                                                             17 Bluegill
                                                                             18 Rockbass
                                                                             19 Longear Sunfish
                                                                             20 Fantail Darter
                                                                             21 Northern Hogsucker
                                                                             22 Golden RedJiorse
                                                                             23 Striped Shiner
                                                                             24 Central Stoneroller
 c.
 CD
 o
 h_
 
-------
100-]

80-
60-

40-

2O-


1
Huron/Erie Lake Plain 2
3
4
5
6
:: 7
ri



1 8
;: 9
: 10
: pa ~ 11
l ilinliii! [| 12
\ 1 1 1 1 l l 1 l l l l 1 l 1 l 1 l 1 1 1 1 1
123456789 23
                                                            Bluntnose Minnow
                                                            Creek Chub
                                                            Green Sunfish
                                                            Blackstripe Topminnow
                                                            Fathead Minnow
                                                            Yellow Bullhead
                                                            Johnny Darter
                                                            White Sucker
                                                            Rockbass
                                                            Rosefin Shiner
                                                            Greenside Darter
                                                            Bluegill
13 Mottled Sculpin
1 4 Common Shiner
15 Rainbow Darter
16 Fantail Darter
17 Spotfin Shiner
1 8 Longear Sunfish
19 Sand Shiner
20 Golden Redhorse
21 Emerald Shiner
22 Central Stoneroller
23 Striped Shiner
a>
o
c
a>
3
0
o
O
^_
c.
a>
0

-------
       500-
          0
                         100
200         300
    DCA Axis I
400
500
Figure 3-8.     Ordination showing regional differences in fish assemblages of 51 representative,
               minimally impacted Oregon streams.   The assemblage of fish  expected for an
               additional regionally  representative stream should be  within or  near  the  area
               circumscribed (Whittier et al. 1988). A = eight sites with 100% Oncorhynchus my kiss
               (five in Sierra Nevada, one each in Cascades, Eastern Cascade Slopes, and Coast
               Range).  B = five sites with only Oncorhynchus mykiss and Cottus per plexus (two in
               Eastern Cascade Slopes, one each in Cascades, Sierra Nevada, and  Coast Range).  A
               and B include all Sierra Nevada sites.  C = two High Desert sites in the Columbia
               River drainage.

                                           61

-------
3.6  SCREENING AND USING AVAILABLE DATA

      There exists a vast amount of environmental data that could be  useful for the kinds of
regional analyses discussed here.   These data have  been collected by a wide variety of agencies
and  institutions  for an equally broad array of purposes. For example, state governments collect
water chemistry data for drinking water assessments, waste water permit compliance,  long-term
monitoring, and detection of undocumented impairment. They also collect aquatic biological data
to maintain sport fisheries, check for aquatic life use impairment, and monitor ambient conditions.
Similar sorts  of aquatic  resource data collections are made by federal, regional,  and local
governments, educational institutions, and private agencies.
      The  sheer volume of data demands some process for selecting a subset that is appropriate
for the current purpose. Another concern about these data must also be considered.  Generally,
the level of data quality is  unknown, and may be  unknowable.   This implies that considerable
caution is needed. For any given geographic area, the available environmental data will have been
obtained, analyzed, and reported in a variety of ways. This means that, unless data from only one
source is used, a strong effort is  needed to check  for comparability and to  bring the data into
compatible formats.   All of  the issues discussed earlier, such  as  geographic  coverage, data
completeness and appropriateness, and data quality, need to be considered in the use of available
data.
      Subsections 3.6.1 and 3.6.2 discuss  an evaluation  and characterization  of ecoregions in
Colorado based on available water chemistry and fisheries data.  This example illustrates how we
evaluated  these data,  the specific kinds of problems  encountered,  and their  solutions.   This
material is meant as a specific example of the  generic issues related to using available data and
not as an indictment of any particular agency's sampling or data.  Similar concerns  should  be
anticipated whenever existing  data are used.

3.6.1  Available Water Chemistry  Data

      The U.S. EPA maintains a very large, nationwide data base of water chemistry data known
as STORET.   The data are supplied by federal, state, regional,  and local agencies  from their
sampling programs.  This data base generally  is the most extensive source of water chemistry
information available and has  been our primary source of water chemistry data for our study on
Colorado streams. There is no one entity with QA/QC oversight for data entered into this system.
      There are approximately 21,000 STORET sampling stations of various types in Colorado.
To simply list all of the stations, with no water chemistry data, would produce nearly 3,000 pages
of printout. Moreover, samples have been collected at  some of  these stations monthly for 20 or
more years. It would  not be  possible, necessary, or advisable to work with all of the  Colorado
water chemistry  data in STORET.  There are many ways to extract data from STORET that
restrict the number of stations  for which data are retrieved. Our final choice of retrieval methods
                                            62

-------
was the result of a trial and error exploration of various subset retrievals, aimed at selecting data
more  directly applicable to our purposes.
      The initial phase of examining the data base was guided by questions  concerning the spatial
distribution of sampling stations, the kinds of chemicals analyzed, the most useful method of
STORET data retrieval, the transfer of station data into a GIS for mapping,  and so on. We looked
for a  balance between the level of detail needed and the level of effort we could afford.  Most
helpful for this process was a combination of software tools  that  (1) selected  sites  by location
(latitude/longitude, county, and hydrologic units), (2) selected sites  by station type (e.g., ambient
stream, lake, outfall) and whether chemicals on the U.S. EPA priority list were analyzed, and (3)
provided summaries of data, and listings of station information headers.
      We experimented with a variety of retrievals for relatively small geographic areas (county,
hydrologic  unit, one-degree-by-one-degree  block)  and  data  formats (e.g., summaries of  all
variables for small sets of stations and basic statistics for selected chemicals and stations). These
retrievals were hand-checked for number and type of stations, kind and amount of chemical data
retrieved, and location of stations.  We decided, for assessing regional patterns of water chemistry,
to limit retrievals to ambient stream stations. Other  stations, such as natural lakes and  wetlands,
are relatively rare in  Colorado, are dependent on groundwater sources (springs, wells), or are
impacted by human activity (reservoirs, outfalls).
      These initial retrievals suggested that the distribution of STORET stations  was very uneven
across the  state.  There was also  evidence of a high  error rate in the locational data. If the
retrieved data were  to be automatically entered into  a GIS for mapping, then the locational data
needed to  be accurate.  We ran a retrieval of station  header data for  all ambient stream sites,
resulting in about 4,800 stations, to assess  the distribution  of sampling stations and the quality of
the locational data.
      About 200 of these stations had no latitude/longitude data (essential  for GIS mapping) and
about 800  had no county codes.  The remainder of the stations were listed in county code order,
so rough estimates of data availability were made by county (Figure 3-9).  Of the 63 counties in
Colorado,  13 had fewer than 15 stations,  including 4 counties with no ambient stream stations.
This  demonstrated an  uneven coverage of the state; large areas with almost no available ambient
stream  chemistry data coincided with areas of  very low annual rainfall and low stream flows.
      A  4% sample  from the  ambient  stations  listing was  hand-checked for  errors in
latitude/longitude, county, hydrologic  unit, and station type  against the  actual location of the
station  description on  1:500,000- and  l:24,000-scale U.S.  Geological Survey topographic  maps.
About 8%  of the stations checked had location  names indicating  they had been improperly coded
as ambient stream sites (lake sites, industrial effluent samples, storm sewer outfalls, wells, and
sediment samples).  Another 8% had no  location description  at all.  About 10% of the station
names were for streams that did not appear on any of our maps.  Of the remainder of the sample,
about 10% had latitude/longitude locations that fell more than one mile from the  appropriate
stream  course on the map, most occurring four to six miles from the stream.  Two stations were
                                             63

-------
   Montezuma
      95   /La Plata
               93
Figure 3-9.    Number of STORET ambient stream stations in Colorado counties.
                                         64

-------
more  than 35 miles off the appropriate location.  About 3.5%  of the stations had incorrect
hydrologic unit codes, and one station had the wrong county code.
      Excluding the stations that could not be located on the maps, the overall error rate was
about  25%.   Other errors were  observed outside of  this sample,  including  cryptic  station
descriptions.   In an extreme example, 90% of the stations coded for Baca County were actually
in Gunnison County,  an error of more than 300  miles.  Based on this assessment,  we hand-
checked every STORET site retrieved before we transferred the data to the GIS.
      A  second difficulty  with the  STORET data is the wide variety of parameter codes
(indicating chemicals and analyses) from which to choose during selection of chemical data.  This
reflects the continuing development of new methods by the scientific community and the attempts
to accommodate these developments through alterations to the data base.  Although this flexibility
is important,  it  has implications for  assessing regional patterns in water chemistry.  First, data
measuring the same  impacts  may  not be directly comparable across sampling  and analytical
methods.  Second,  the problem of choosing parameter codes and/or deciding on some combination
of codes for the same chemical or impact becomes complex. This effectively reduces the amount
of useful  data.  Third, there may be  no parameter code that matches directly with a particular
generic problem.   For example, Total Dissolved Solids is an item of major concern in western
Colorado, yet there is no STORET variable code for Total Dissolved Solids. Instead, there are
at least 10 codes that appear to be related to  that issue (Table 3-1).
       Many of the nutrient measures have an equally bewildering array  of codes associated with
different  ways of  quantifying nutrients.  As an example, in one listing of only 89 stations there
were 22 different  ways of measuring and reporting  nitrogen.  For metals, there was often a choice
of dissolved, suspended, total, and total recoverable.  The parameter codes eventually chosen for
our analyses were those that, from our "test" retrievals, had the largest number of samples and
appeared  to be what we needed.  Our final method for extracting data from STORET was based
on these considerations: (1) STORET station headings contained  a high percentage of error, so
each  station had to be hand-checked for  location and  station type, (2) STORET  output files had
to be reformatted before they could be used directly by  the GIS, (3) most stations had sample
measurements on  a minority of the  variables of interest, although conductivity, alkalinity, and
hardness were sampled at many stations, and (4) many stations were sampled only once. We were
further concerned about changes in analytical  methods  over  time and  about  combining data
gathered  over a long span of time.
       Our initial  aims were to produce dot maps of single variables and to use the GIS data base
to extract values  for  boxplots to show the spatial (regional) distribution of chemical values. We
retrieved station-by-station summaries of the selected variables.  We requested median values over
all samples taken  in the last 10 years (since January 1978) from all ambient stream stations that
 had ever been sampled for any of the codes in one of the three variable  groups we used: metals
 (cadmium, zinc, lead, mercury, and copper), nutrients (nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen, Kjeldahl-nitrogen,
 total  ammonia, total  phosphorus, and two  orthophosphate measures),  and miscellaneous (total
                                             65

-------
Table 3-1.     STORET Parameter Codes that Appear  to be Related to Total Dissolved Solids
              Concentrations Based on Selected Retrievals of Ambient Stream Stations in Colorado
              Parameter
                Code
 Computer Printout
   Abbreviation
              (00500)
              (00505)
              (00515)
              (00530)
              (00545)
              (70299)
              (70300)
              (70301)
              (70302)
              (70303)
Residue  ~ Total
Residue  ~ Tot Vol
Residue  — Diss-105C
Residue  -- Tot Nflt
Residue  — Settlable
Red-Susp at 180C
Residue  — Diss-180C
Diss Sol — Sum
Diss Sol — Ton/day
Diss Sol — Tons/Acre-ft
                                           66

-------
dissolved solids and suspended sediments).  We extracted separate files for each group.  Because
the ionic strength measures (conductivity, hardness, alkalinity) were collected at most stations, we
also retrieved median values of these with each group.  In the long run, it may have been more
effective to have extracted all data into one file, but it was initially easier to process  relatively
small files  of related information; also, we needed to experiment with a small file on the GIS to
assess the value of this approach and these data.
      We wrote a FORTRAN program to modify the STORET output into a tabular (list) form
suitable for transfer to  the GIS.  Printouts of these files were hand-checked  for locational errors
as discussed earlier.  Sites with descriptions  that were cryptic or missing, or that  referred to
something  other than ambient streams, were removed from the files.  The latitude/longitude  data
were located on maps and compared with the station descriptions. Stations with latitude/longitude
coordinates within one  mile of the appropriate stream course were accepted. A few stations had
what appeared to  be single-digit data entry errors.  Changing one digit in either the latitude or
longitude placed the data collection location on the proper stream. This range of acceptable errors
was appropriate for our regional-scale assessments.  Stations  that did not meet these criteria or
could not  be located on the maps  were removed from the files. For the nutrient data, we also
removed stations  that were obviously immediately downstream from lakes  and reservoirs.   We
removed 17%, 18%, and 19% of the sites from the miscellaneous, metals, and nutrient  retrievals,
respectively, leaving 732,  821, and 1,111 stations. These data were loaded into the GIS as three
separate files.
      A set of dot maps was  produced for the chemical values in Colorado streams, one map per
chemical.   A range of six colors from light yellow to dark brown represented low to  high
concentrations.  Initially, the  six class ranges were chosen by estimating where class breaks would
produce groups of relatively even size.  Colors for the classes were then projected onto a Colorado
map that  included ecoregion lines.  The color classes were not chosen or shifted to  emphasize
ecoregional differences.
      Plates 2 and 3 are representative examples of these dot maps, showing  statewide patterns
in median conductivity and  Kjeldahl-nitrogen.  Some general conclusions may be drawn from
these maps.  First, as might be expected, the Southern Rockies Ecoregion has distinctly different
water chemistry from  the other ecoregions in Colorado.  A vast majority of the stations  in this
region  are in the two  lowest classes for conductivity (representative  of ionic strength measures)
and a smaller majority are  in the two lowest  classes for Kjeldahl-nitrogen (representative of
nutrient measures).  In the  case  of conductivity,  it almost appears as though  the  ecoregion
boundary  was tailored  to  include as many light yellow dots as possible.  On the east  slope of the
Southern Rockies, there is a downstream effect in the  foothill areas in the two plains ecoregions,
seen in the fringe of light yellow  dots along the boundary  in these eastern regions.  The  change
in water type is more abrupt  along the western boundary of the ecoregion. Many of the moderate
 concentration values in the Southern Rockies occur in the semi-desert shrublands subregion (Plate
 1), the lowest elevation portion of the  ecoregion.
                                              67

-------
      Second, there do not appear to  be strong regional differences among the nonmountainous
regions for measures of ionic strength.  But the two eastern plains ecoregions, the Western High
Plains and Southwest Tablelands, appear to have more nutrient enriched streams than do the other
nonmontane  regions,  and there is a definite  downstream effect below  cities.   There  is no
ecoregional pattern for metals, only hotspots, which occur in the Rockies and near cities.
      The distribution of ambient stream STORET stations sampled in the last decade  is less than
optimal for our purpose.  The  few stations in the eastern third of Colorado occur  along large
rivers.  There is a relative lack of stations in the eastern, northern, and southern  portions of the
Rockies  ecoregion  and in the Arizona/New Mexico Plateau.   Most stations appear along the
western boundary,  in the foothills  and on the edge of the plains, of the two eastern  regions, in
a large oval area centered in the west-central Rockies, in portions of the Wyoming  Basin, and over
much  of the Colorado Plateau.   This  distribution  reflects an  interest in problem  areas  near
population centers and major resource developments (oil shale, coal, and metal mining). Thus the
data can not  be used for estimating minimally impacted conditions or for rigorously assessing the
ecoregions and subregions.
      The data base  capabilities of  the GIS were used to extract  station median  values by
ecoregion for each  chemical  to  produce boxplots.  We expected the boxplots  to  confirm and
quantify the  information gained from the dot maps. In general this was true, but we gained other
insights.  For conductivity (Figure 3-10), the low  values of the  Southern Rockies were obvious,
but similarity in values between the Wyoming Basin and the Arizona/New Mexico  Plateau became
more apparent.  For some of the nutrients, the regional median values did not vary noticeably
(Figure 3-11).  The  real regional differences occurred in  the skewness that showed above the
medians,  that is, the increased range  and number of stations  impacted by nutrients  in the two
eastern ecoregions.
      To gain further insight  into  regional water chemistry patterns, we ran a  number  of
multivariate  analyses, initially a principal components analysis (these analyses cannot be run if
there are missing values).  We chose to  run the multivariate analyses  on hardness, conductivity,
and  alkalinity for ionic strength.  Among the nutrients,  we chose nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen (for
inorganic nitrogen), Kjeldahl-nitrogen (for organic nitrogen), and total phosphorus.
      It is desirable to analyze data for which samples have been  taken on several dates, to reduce
the influence of possible outliers (we ignored seasonal variability for this  study).  We used the
nutrients  data  file,  with 1,111  stations containing various  combinations of nutrient and ionic
strength  measures.   In this file,  385 stations had all 3  ionic strength measures taken at least  3
times, but only 51 stations had all 3 nutrient measures taken 3 or  more times, and only 38 stations
had  all 6 variables  taken 3 or more times.   Selecting stations that had all 6 parameters taken at
least once gave us 71 stations.
      We were concerned about  the spatial distribution of  these 71 stations, and about whether
they had been heavily impacted by human activity.  We mapped their locations and evaluated for
impacts based on location and site description. We removed stations that were in  or immediately
                                             68

-------
               6500
61000
                                                    10100     5300
^•uuu-


~
^^^
o 3000-
.c
e
^~
>> 2000-
>
•4— -
O
13
? 1000-
o
O

T
I
^
\









r









1
y
	

DI
.E c
E "<"


















1

^








1


L

O
a
o



^







»


r
i









-i




1

en
O
1-  ^









1

T.

=>• § •- -Median g
K S
1 h r~25 t
j_ Y-10^
Relative
Sample Size




•

f

- *" -S
- (DC

Figure 3-10.     Regional patterns of conductivity in Colorado streams.  Data are the same as for
                Plate 2.
                                           69

-------
            19.0
7-

**"""** & "-


3 5-

c
CD 4-
o
V-
i 3-
o 2 *"
\^ 4 __
n
J











!











1 q


7

CT O t/)
C c -on
'i « Eg
o ° o ••-
>,CD -5 o
-i— tj —
5 00-
O.I











— •— 1
— 1











i — i —
j
1 1
c
«  j~
'C 3-
IH-.O
^
1








	
i

















^^

l^f

'«,
c c
•4— Q_
J-^
i











1


u.u
-: is










O)
o>
C |
0 *
cc
n — 90
LI -75

>_ _ Med


iV-
Relative
Sample Size




_J
_L

rn







Q> C
3 o
JE
•«
/
— 03
D o


                                                                                            
-------
downstream from cities, or that had extremely high nutrient levels. This left 48 stations for analysis.
We also  evaluated  whether  the  contributing watershed for a station was representative of  its
ecoregion, or whether most of the waters came from another region.  Based on this, we changed the
ecoregion designation for eight stations, to more appropriately indicate the region of representation,
and designated four others as boundary sites, with about 50% of the water coming from another
region.
      The correlations among  the three ionic strength measures were high (> 0.87), and the first
principal component accounted for 93.9% of the variability.  The correlations among the nutrient
measures were not as high. Kjeldahl-nitrogen correlated with the nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen (r = 0.41)
and total phosphorus (r = 0.55), but total phosphorus and nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen were less correlated
(r = 0.17). Thus the first principal component accounted for 59% of the variability and was weighted
by Kjeldahl-nitrogen (0.66), total phosphorus (0.58), and nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen (0.48). These results
are generally consistent with our  work in Ohio (Larsen et al.  1988; Whittier et al. 1987) and Oregon
(Whittier et al. 1988).
      A scatterplot (Figure 3-12) of the first principal components (1st axes) of each analysis showed
reasonable regional patterns; the Southern Rockies sites had low ionic strength and  low nutrient
enrichment.  There was considerable overlap of site  values in the Colorado Plateau and Wyoming
Basin Ecoregions,  with  both having high ionic  strength and moderately low to moderately high
nutrient enrichment. The Southwest Tablelands (four sites) had moderate ionic strength and moderate
to high nutrient concentrations. The Arizona/New Mexico Plateau (four sites) had low to moderate
levels of both variable types. The single Western High Plains site had very high nutrients and ionic
strength. A canonical discriminant analysis  from the same data produced very similar results.
      An alternative or supplement to the principal  components analyses is to plot the  site values
of 2 or 3 chemicals together. Three-dimensional plots contain more information than  two-variable
scatterplots, but are more difficult to produce and interpret.  Careful selection of variables will help
avoid a proliferation of scatterplots.  Conductivity should serve as a good surrogate  for the  ionic
strength measures, due to their strong correlation. Total phosphorus and nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen were
the least correlated nutrient pairs,  and thus, should have less redundant information.  Figure 3-13
presents three scatterplots of the log-transformed values of these three variables.  The first plot shows
regional patterns similar to  the PCA plot (Figure 3-12). We expect this because total phosphorus
loads most strongly on  the  nutrients  PCA axis  I.  These plots show that total phosphorus  helps
differentiate  the Arizona/New Mexico Plateau  and  the  Southern Rockies Ecoregions, while
nitrates/nitrites help differentiate  the Wyoming Basin and the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregions.  It is
important to remember that, because these sites are not regional reference sites, the results can only
suggest ecoregional differences.
       We ran two additional multivariate analyses, discriminant analysis and stepwise discriminant
 analysis, on these data minus  the single Western High Plains site (47 sites).  Discriminant analysis
 identified the percentage of sites correctly classified  by ecoregion, based on the six water chemistry
                                              71

-------
        3.0-
  O
  £,    2.0
   £    1.0-1
o
*      0-]
   c
   
-------
          o>
               0.6'
               0.5-
               0.4-
          —   0.3 -
              1  Wyoming
                Basin

              2 Colorado
                Plateaus

              3 Southern
                Rockies

              4 Arizona/New Mexico
                Plateau

              5 Western
                High Plains
                  1.8     2.0     2.2     2.4     2.6    2.8     3.0     3.2     3.4
          a>
          O   0.2-
               0.1 -
              6 Southwest
                Tablelands
 in
 i_
 O
-C
 Q.
 
-------
values. The Arizona/New Mexico Plateau had only 50% correct classification, the other four regions
ranged from 71.4 to 80%.  Of the  12 misclassified sites, 4 had probabilities of membership in the
correct ecoregion that differed by  less than 10%.  The stepwise discriminant analysis identified the
variables most responsible for class differences (ecoregion membership). These were, in order of
inclusion in the discriminant function, conductivity, nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen, hardness, and total
phosphorus.
      The overall results of these analyses are that spatial patterns in water  chemistry for Colorado
streams can be demonstrated at the regional level of resolution by using available data. This can be
done  despite very serious problems and shortcomings in the data,  because  the sheer volume of
information overrides  some of the noise.  Thus, we can be fairly confident that streams in the
Southern Rockies Ecoregion have  considerably lower ionic strength and are less nutrient enriched
than the other ecoregions in Colorado, and the two plains ecoregions in eastern Colorado generally
have more  highly enriched water than the other nonmontane regions.

3.6.2  Available Biological Data

      The  use  of available biological data is hampered  by most  of the  same problems of QC
(appropriateness of sampling and reporting, and coverage [spatial distribution] of sampling) as the
use of water chemistry data.  In addition, there are no national data bases at present.  This leads to
the generic problems  of lack of  standardized sampling and,  particularly,  lack of standardized
reporting and data base structure.   Problems imposed by the condition of  the data require that a
strong level of effort be expended to extract useful information.
      For any sizeable geographic area, biological data have probably been  gathered by  federal,
regional, state,  and local government agencies, by academic researchers, and, in areas of resource
development, by private  corporations.   The problem is not usually a lack  of data,  but rather,
difficulties  in obtaining and restructuring the data into usable formats, in  computerizing  paper
copies, and in assessing the quality of, and biases in, sampling.
      The  largest, centrally located or administered collections of biological data are  with state
wildlife or fisheries departments, or with major university museums. State wildlife department data
tend to be biased toward selective  sampling for and/or reporting of mostly game fish, and toward
sampling mostly in areas where sport fisheries are expected.  These departments generally will not
have much, if any, nonfish biological data.  University museum and/or academic departmental data
may not be computerized and may not be freely available.  If there are computerized data bases, they
usually consist of one or two large everything-by-everything files.
      Although considerable nongame biological research has been conducted, mostly by academic
institutions, it is usually very difficult to assemble even a small minority of the data.  The results
reported  in journal articles or books are almost always  summaries.  Thus,  the precise sampling
locations and dates, species occurrences and abundances, and concurrent data (e.g., physical habitat,
water chemistry) are not provided. To acquire these data usually requires  much time and energy.
                                             74

-------
Often the raw data no longer exist, are in paper form, or may 'hot be released.  In this subsection, we
present examples of these problems, and of the difficulties in using data for purposes other than that
for which they were intended, as they were encountered in the Colorado project.
      The Colorado Division of Wildlife maintains a relatively large (approximately 3 megabytes)
data base of about 4,700 stream reaches and associated fish and habitat data. This data base consists
of two files, streams and fish, organized by stream reach rather than by collection.  The streams file
has 80 fields of mostly physical characteristics, spanning  645 columns.  Although the Colorado
Division of Wildlife supposedly provided us with a complete data base, several of the stream codes
in the fish file did not match any in the streams file, so we do not know where these were collected.
Also, a slight majority of the stream reaches reported no fish.
      This data base had the usual data quality problems, such  as incorrect locations, species codes,
etc.  In addition, several features of the data (structure, manner of coding, etc.) made it impossible
to answer some questions at all or to assure good results.  For example, there are  four fields that
record the percentage of a stream damaged by such factors as mining; an entry of 0 indicates no
information gathered, rather than zero damage from that source.  There are  other instances of not
being able to distinguish between no data collected and data value equal to zero.
      Other problems arose from the organization  of the data by stream reaches rather  than by
collection.  If two or more collections were made on one reach,  then at least two outcomes were
possible. First, the most recent collection replaced the earlier, and historical information was lost.
Second, the new collection was simply added in and species richness increased. This imposed strange
results on the data; that is,  the field that sometimes  listed the relative abundances of the species at
a site often added up to more than 100%. This happened when a new species was found and another,
previously listed, species was not collected. The relative abundances of the previously found species
remained in the data record and the currently collected species' relative abundances, which added up
to 100%, were updated. It seemed as though multiple collections had been handled both ways, and
it was not possible to know, without the original data, which method was used, or, in many cases, to
know whether multiple collections had been made. Thus, at some sites, the abundance data had little
value, and the presence/absence form of the data included more species than  had been found at any
one time.
      There were other concerns, such as no indication of the  purpose, quality, or completeness of
the sampling. That is, did they collect and record all species or just certain game  fish?  Were they
able to adequately sample all habitats for all species, or were there problems?  Stream reaches (the
default sites) ranged from a few tenths of a kilometer to over 150 kilometers. Sampling was supposed
to have occurred near the lower end of the reach, but actual sampling locations were not recorded.
All locations were given as township, range, and section, and thus GIS mapping of these data could
not be done without locating the points by hand and determining approximate latitude and longitude
coordinates.  This was additionally complicated by the fact that Colorado has four separate land
survey grids, as well as sizeable areas not included in any township system.  Finally, a majority of
the Colorado Division of Wildlife fish data were in the Southern Rockies Ecoregion, an area of great
                                             75

-------
sports fishing potential. This area has been subject to a large fish stocking program, thus much of
the fish data probably were greatly influenced by human intervention.
      We acquired other biological data to supplement the Colorado Division of Wildlife data from
a number of sources. The Colorado Division of Wildlife commissioned a number of studies of various
drainages, often by graduate students at Colorado State University; Propst (1982) sampled 197 sites
in the warmwater portion of the Platte River system, Loeffler et al. (1982) made 137 collections in
the warmwater portion of the  Arkansas  River system, and Goettl (1982) evaluated the fisheries
potential in the foothills and plains  sections of the Arkansas, Cache la Poudre, and South Platte
Rivers. The U.S. EPA commissioned Ruiter and Bishop to summarize existing knowledge of surface
water systems in areas of potential oil shale development (tributaries and lower mainstems of the
White and  Colorado Rivers) (Ruiter and Bishop 1984a) and the Yampa River Basin (Ruiter and
Bishop 1984b). Lewis and Saunders (1985) studied a 26-mile segment of the South Platte, beginning
just downstream from Denver,  for the Metropolitan Denver Sewage Disposal District. Saunders et
al. (1982) summarized existing aquatic ecosystems information in northwest Colorado for the Bureau
of Land Management,  but deferred to  other  studies for fish  data, and provided  very general
summaries of macroinvertebrate data. They shared misgivings similar to ours about using these data.
      From the Propst, Goettl, and  Loeffler reports, we have fairly good, site specific,  fish data
coverage of streams in the Western High Plains and the Southwest Tablelands  Ecoregions.  One
option for analysis is a relatively intensive assessment of these two regions.   For regional analysis
to be effective, the following steps should be taken for each of the 350 sites:

      a.     Plot site locations  on l:250,000-scale U.S. Geological Survey topographic maps.
      b.     Estimate stream size class.
      c.     Evaluate the regional representativeness of the site, from a variety of maps, and the
             probable human impacts,  from land use maps and point and nonpoint source data.
      d.     Computerize the species abundance and site data.
      e.     Select regional reference sites.

The regional reference data could be subjected to the kinds of analyses performed in the other state
studies.  For the data from these two regions alone, this process could conceivably consume more than
half a labor-year.
      Another option is a more qualitative  assessment of regional fish distributions.  Given the
apparent low quality and large quantity of data statewide and the resources available for this project,
we chose this  option.  Because the  state is probably maintaining artificially high populations of
introduced game species, particularly in the Southern Rockies, the trout species data do not represent
natural regional patterns.  Thus, we assessed the nontrout species data by mapping every reported
occurrence of these fish.  Species locations were marked with a dot on a l:2,500,000-scale map of
Colorado.  At this scale, species locations are only rough approximations (errors of 8 km may occur),
but will show regional-scale patterns.
                                              76

-------
      Each data source presented its own limitations and difficulties for mapping.  Propst's (1982)
data were organized by species, rather than by collection, and included dot maps for all species he
collected in the North and South Platte River systems in Colorado. For that part  of the state we
added dots to his maps from other data sources. However, it became clear that some, but not all, of
his data were in the Colorado Division of Wildlife data base, and some of his locations had been
sampled by others.  It  would have been very time consuming to check every species at every site for
duplication in the Colorado Division of Wildlife data. Thus, some species occurrences may have been
mapped twice.
      The Loeffler et al.  (1982) report contained three  maps of sample locations in the Arkansas
River drainage, one for each sampling year.  Using these maps, we transferred their data onto our
                                                        '"3*.
state maps.  However, some sites were sampled more than  once, so some species occurrences may
be double-mapped.  In  addition, their sampling was aimed at locating threatened species,  and so
may be biased toward locations with uncommon fish.  Although the Colorado Division of Wildlife
paid for the report, these  data are not in their data base.
      The Ruiter and Bishop reports (1984a, 1984b), on the surface waters of the  oil shale region
and the Yampa River basin, are summaries of other studies.  These contain a fair amount  of fish
species information not included in the Colorado Division of Wildlife data base.  However,  only
approximate locational  information was available.  For some streams, Ruiter and Bishop  simply
listed the species reported anywhere within the basin. For others, they mapped the sampling locations
for each study and provided a table of all species reported by each study, but not  the location for
each species. Sometimes fish distributions were presented as a table of occurrences within a defined
reach of  the stream.   Thus, mapping their information  either over- or under-reports  species
occurrences.
       For the remainder of the state, consisting of the east slope and the central and southern west
slope of the Rockies, the  Republican River basin, and  the southwest/southcentral portions of the
state, we  have only the Colorado Division of Wildlife data. Outside of the Rockies, there is very
limited coverage.  Thus,  we can realistically make only a very general, qualitative assessment of
regional fish patterns.
       We added the  ecoregion boundaries on our fish  data maps and counted the dots for  each
species in each  region, producing  a list of all nontrout species reported per ecoregion and  their
relative frequency of  occurrence. To visualize these patterns, the species' site counts were converted
to fractions of the count for the most widespread species in that region. The relative frequencies of
occurrence were plotted as histograms to produce a species signature (Figure 3-14). This figure is
only a rough qualitative representation of the relative commonness, by region, of nontrout species.
The Wyoming Basin and the Arizona/New Mexico Plateau regions had very few sites.
       Interpreting  regional patterns in fish distributions is complicated  by the strong river basin
effect. For example, many species are found on only one side of the continental divide. In Colorado,
there is a moderate spatial correspondence between river drainages and nonmontane ecoregions, so
that a fair amount of the  regional differences in fish distributions can also be explained by basins.
                                             77

-------
       Southern
       Rockies
                                                       n
Arizona/
New Mexico
Plateau
-

.•;
E*SI [S3 H E53 t'l
I""1"
V


• '
       Colorado
       Plateaus
       Wyoming
        Basin
       Western
     High Plains
      Southwest
      Tablelands
-..
•<•*

[1 „. • rf.™
.•
:4

*!


1 1 H n nFI w
                 nSEj
	Hnnnnnn
                                                                           EL
Figure 3-14.     Regional relative frequency of occurrence of fish in Colorado streams.  For each

               species, the height of the bar is relative to the frequency of occurrence of the most

               widespread (most commonly sampled) nontrout species in that region.  Counts of

               sample sites were determined as described in Subsection 3.6.2.  These species

               signatures are very qualitative.
                                        78

-------
      The white sucker and  fathead minnow are  nearly ubiquitous in Colorado,  except  in the
Southern Rockies Ecoregion.  The two eastern regions have similar species makeup.  The flathead
chub was found only in the Arkansas River system, and thus, only in the Southwestern Tablelands
Ecoregion.  The sand shiner, red shiner, stoneroller, and plains killifish were more common in the
Southwestern Tablelands than in the Western High Plains Ecoregion.  The creek chub and longnose
sucker were more common in the Western High Plains, as were some  large river species uncommon
in Colorado, such as river carpsucker, suckermouth minnow, gizzard shad, and orangespotted sunf ish.
The latter three species occurred in the Arkansas River near where it flows into  the Western High
Plains Ecoregion; however this apparent regional effect is most likely due to water release from the
John Martin Reservoir, as the river dries up completely in western Kansas (D.L. Miller, pers. comm.).
      The fish species  composition of the Wyoming Basin Ecoregion  is transitional between that  of
the eastern plains ecoregions and the nonmontane regions west of the divide. In Colorado, a portion
of the Wyoming Basin  Ecoregion is in the North  Platte River drainage and the remainder is in the
Colorado River drainage.  The johnny darter is most common in this region, but only east of the
divide. Most of the remaining species characteristic of the Colorado portion of this ecoregion occur
only on the west side.
      The  Colorado River system, and thus the  Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion, is characterized  by
western large river fish such as the six species on the right side of  Figure 3-14, and by speckled
dace and mottled sculpin in the smaller streams. The mountain sucker and mountain whitefish were
found only in the northwest quarter of the state.  The Arizona/New Mexico Plateau occurs on both
sides of the divide and  had species characteristic of both drainage systems. We had very few samples
from this region, particularly in the Rio Grande drainage.  The Southern Rockies Ecoregion was
dominated by various introduced trout species. Most of the nontrout  species in this region occurred
only on the west side,  except for white sucker and  longnose sucker.
       We mapped the  Colorado Division of Wildlife data for cutthroat trout, the  only Colorado
native trout, and found the expected large number of sites in the Southern Rockies Ecoregion, about
four times that of the most common nontrout species. Data for the nonmountainous regions showed
that many streams maintain enough mountainous character to  support trout for some distance into
nonmountainous regions.  A similar pattern occurs  in Oregon (Hughes and Gammon 1987; Hughes
et al.  1987).  Also, the Colorado Division of Wildlife appeared to have sampled a relatively large
number of cutthroat sites in the Colorado Plateaus, Wyoming Basin, and Arizona/New Mexico Plateau
Ecoregions, which are  not generally considered trout regions. In fact, these data imply that trout  are
the most widespread fish in the Colorado Plateaus Ecoregion.  This tends to confirm our suspicions
about the game fish bias in sampling and reporting.
       We also mapped the locations of streams with no fish reported, to identify spatial patterns of
streams not supporting fish.   Most of these were listed as gulches,  implying that they were short
streams with  very little or  no water much of the year, but subject to random  torrential flows that
eliminate fish. There  were no apparent spatial patterns in these data.
                                             79

-------
3.7 SECTION SUMMARY

      In this section we have presented an overview of some of the issues and methods involved in
using environmental data to evaluate regional characteristics, as well as some examples of results
from these evaluations.  Quantification of the range of data values  representing various regional
characteristics can be accomplished by collecting and analyzing environmental data at selected sites,
including minimally impacted reference sites, or by judicious use of existing data. The next section
illustrates how the results of this process, within an ecoregional framework, can be used for resource
management and regulation.
                                             80

-------
                                        SECTION 4

                      APPLICATIONS OF A REGIONAL APPROACH

4.1  INTRODUCTION

    Most of the development of the ecoregional assessment process was stimulated by a need within
the regulatory framework of the National Environmental Policy Act (Public Law 91-190,1 Jan. 1970)
and, more recently, the Clean Water Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act (WQA) (Public Law
92-500, 18 Oct. 72), and numerous amendments, to assess existing and attainable water quality.
Stimulus for  development of this framework came from several state water quality agencies  that
wanted to improve their water quality assessment and management procedures.  So, most of the
development  and evaluation were conducted in cooperation  with state water quality agencies.
Accordingly, our discussions reflect  a preponderance of state applications within the  context of
meeting the WQA mandates. Several common themes occur throughout the examples of state studies:
the characterization of least impacted, regional reference sites to define ecological attainability in
different regions and identify resources that may need protection, the use of ecoregions as an
organizational  framework  for assessing and  interpreting environmental data, and the use of
ecoregions as statistical strata for the development of sound sampling designs to estimate the status
of spatially distributed ecological resources.
    This section has been organized into three main parts.  Section 4.2 describes how this regional
framework has been used by several states to meet some of the requirements of the U.S. EPA's Water
Quality Standards Regulation, which describes how specific parts of the WQA are  to be addressed.
Section 4.3 summarizes examples in which this regional framework has been used for monitoring,
assessment, and reporting, as required by WQA sections 305(b), 314 (clean lakes), and 319 (nonpoint
sources), and as a basis for state and national sampling designs (e.g., National Acidic Precipitation
Assessment Program lake and stream surveys [Linthurst et al. 1986; Landers et al. 1987; Kaufmann
et al.  1988]).  Section 4.4 offers a general description of various potential applications.  Whereas
Sections 4.2 and 4.3 show how the process has been incorporated into national or state regulatory and
assessment programs, Section  4.4 describes some directions in which we think this approach has
additional utility, although they have not yet been tried.  Some of these possible applications are
under consideration by various state agencies; others have not been explored in any depth. We offer
the ideas to stimulate interest and discussion; further  discussion, development, and testing will be
required prior to their use.

4.2 WATER QUALITY STANDARDS

    The WQA clearly articulates the goal of restoring and maintaining the ecological integrity of
the nation's waters.  This goal is stated throughout the document, including ...restore and maintain
                                             81

-------
the chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the nation's waters, ...assure protection and pro-
pagation of a balanced indigenous population of fish, shellfish, and wildlife, ...develop and publish
criteria on the  effects of pollutants on biological community diversity, productivity, and stability,
including information on  factors affecting ....rates of organic and  inorganic sedimentation for
varying types of receiving  waters. Section 303(c) of the Act requires that water quality standards
are to protect  the public  health and welfare, enhance the quality  of the water, and serve the
purposes  of the Act by taking  into consideration their use and value for public water supplies,
protection  and  propagation of fish and  wildlife, recreation,  agricultural and  industrial water
supplies, and navigation.
    The U.S. EPA's Water Quality  Standards Regulation (WQSR) (40 CFR Part 13) addresses the
WQA  requirements concerning  protection and  restoration  of  physical, chemical and biological
integrity of the nation's  waters.  The regulation  describes the standards  in  three parts:  (1)
designated uses, (2) criteria (numeric or narrative) that, if achieved,  protect designated uses, and
(3) antidegradation.  Designated uses are the goals for specific  water bodies  and include  aquatic
life  (e.g.,  fishing),  recreation  (e.g.,  swimming  and  aesthetics),  or  water supply  (domestic,
agricultural, industrial).  Subcategories may also be used;  for example, aquatic life uses might be
subdivided into warmwater and  coldwater,  or  further subdivided  into  warmwater  habitat,
exceptional warmwater habitat,  or limited  resource.
    In the past,  EPA focused on limiting  pollutant discharges based  on the best available
technology.  However, now that many of  the  more dramatic  water quality and human health
problems have  been resolved, attention is being  focused on the remaining, often more  subtle and
complex, pollution  problems, including nonpoint source  pollution.   This shift is reflected in a
focus on the quality of receiving waters  and on the variety of tools required to achieve water
quality goals for specific water  bodies.
    An important aspect for achieving the goals of the WQA is the ability to specify ecologically
achievable  goals.   Some states  have recognized  the need to  accommodate regionally  varying
achievable quality and the need to define aquatic life uses  more  explicitly through biological
criteria. In some cases, an ecoregional framework has been used to set chemical and biological
criteria to supplement traditional methods.  Case studies from Arkansas and Ohio  are summarized
in Subsections 4.2.1  and 4.2.2 to illustrate how chemical and/or biological criteria can be developed
using the regional framework.   A synopsis  of their sampling design and frequency of sampling
is included in  Appendix  B.  In Minnesota,  a regional  framework was  used  to  organize  and
interpret existing  stream and lake data, primarily for assessing  trophic condition and attainable
trophic quality.  A  discussion of Minnesota's efforts is presented in Section  4.3.

4.2.1   Arkansas

    The Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology is charged with carrying  out the
mandates of the  WQA  and   WQSR  in  Arkansas.  The  Department adopted an ecoregional
                                              82

-------
framework to  identify natural differences  in  existing and achievable chemical quality among
streams in different  parts of the state.  The Department also wanted to acknowledge regional
differences in stream biotic assemblages.  But a formal process was needed to identify areas where
similar chemical and  biological quality could be expected.  This was especially critical with regard
to dissolved oxygen, because in some areas it appeared that the national or statewide criteria could
not reasonably be achieved even in streams not impacted by  point  and nonpoint sources  of
pollution; in late summer, these streams of low dissolved oxygen supported  diverse, viable fish
communities.  In other cases, the Department thought  criteria were not stringent enough to protect
aquatic life uses.  The results of sampling and characterizing reference streams within an ecoregion
framework supported these observations in a more determinant way.
     Thus, the Arkansas  Department of Pollution Control  and Ecology  developed and adopted
regionally specific numeric criteria for selected water quality  attributes, based on observations at
regional reference streams.  These included temperature, turbidity,  and dissolved oxygen. For
dissolved oxygen,  the criteria were further stratified into values for streams of different watershed
sizes within each region.  In some cases, particular rivers received specific criteria.  Table 4-1 and
Figure 4-1  present a summary of these regionally specific criteria.
     The  Department has also  used the regional framework to establish narrative biological goals
for  streams.   The state's  Fisheries use  designation addresses  the  WQA requirement for  the
protection and propagation of  fish, shellfish, and  other  forms of aquatic life.   This  use is
subdivided into three categories:  (1) trout, (2) lakes and reservoirs, and (3) streams.  For streams,
the Department describes the characteristics of regional fish assemblages that are to be achieved
to meet  this  use   designation,  based on  the regional  reference  stream  collections.   Thus,  for
particular streams, assessment  of use attainment is based partially on a comparison of the resident
assemblage  with the regional reference assemblage (Table 4-2).

4.2.2  Ohio

     Ohio's Water  Quality Standards are designed to  provide  a basis  for  protecting and restoring
surface  waters for a variety of uses,  including  the  protection and  propagation of aquatic life.
Aquatic life use designations established by the  Ohio Environmental Protection Agency include:
warmwater habitat, modified warmwater  habitat (proposed),  exceptional  warmwater habitat,
coldwater habitat, seasonal salmonid habitat,  and limited  resource  waters.   These designations
have been qualitatively defined in ecological terms,  and  chemical criteria, either quantitative or
narrative, have been established for each.  In  addition, numerical biological criteria (biocriteria)
have been defined for three of the classes (warmwater habitat, modified warmwater habitat, and
 exceptional warmwater habitat), based on instream fish and macroinvertebrate assemblages. The
 Ohio  EPA used  the ecoregional framework  to develop a  reference  set of data to establish
 biocriteria.
                                              83

-------
Table 4-1.  Regional  Temperature  and Turbidity Criteria for  Arkansas  Streams (Arkansas
           Department of Pollution Control and Ecology 1988)
Ecoregion
Ozark Highlands
Boston Mountains
Arkansas Valley
Ouachita Mountains
South Central Plains
Mississippi Alluvial Plain
Channel-altered Mississippi Alluvial Plain
Temperature1
(°C)
29
31
31
30
30
30
32
Turbidity2
(NTU)
10
10
21
10
21
45
75
1   Maximum allowable temperatures from human-induced causes.
2   Maximum allowable turbidity from human-induced causes.
                                          84

-------
                          Dissolved Oxygen Standard  (mg/L)
  Mississippi
 Alluvial Plain
 South Central ™®****®**
    Plains
Ouachita Mtns
     Arkansas
      Valley
  Boston Mtns
      Ozark
    Highlands
                    16
                  160
                         2
Watershed Size  (km  )
800
Figure 4-1.  Dissolved oxygen standards for Arkansas streams during the critical season (late summer

           low flow).  This figure illustrates the relationships among oxygen criteria, stream size

           (based on watershed size), and ecoregions in Arkansas. Bennett et al. (1987) and Giese

           et al. (1987) should be consulted for details regarding these standards.
                                        85

-------
Table 4-2. Summary of  Arkansas'  Descriptions of  Fish Communities in  Reference Streams
           (Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and  Ecology 1988).   In all ecoregions,
           streams are  to support diverse communities of indigenous or adapted species of fish
           and other forms of aquatic life.
Eco region
 Key Species1
Indicator Species2
(a)   Ozark Highlands - Characterized by a
     preponderance of sensitive species  and
     normally dominated by a diverse min-
     now community followed by sunfishes
     and darters.
Duskystripe shiner
Northern hogsucker
Slender madtom
"Rock" basses
Rainbow and/or
Orangethroat darters
Smallmouth bass
Banded sculpin
Ozark madtom
Southern redbelly dace
Whitetail shiner
Ozark minnow
(b)  Boston Mountains - Characterized by
     a major proportion of sensitive species;
     a diverse, often darter-dominated
     community exists, but with nearly
     equal  proportions of minnows  and
     sunfishes.
Bigeye shiner
Black redhorse
Slender madtom
Longear sunfish
Greenside darter
Smallmouth bass
Shadow bass
Wedgespot shiner
Longnose darter
(c)   Arkansas Valley - Characterized by a
     substantial proportion of sensitive
     species; a sunfish- and minnow-
     dominated community exists, but
     with substantial proportions  of
     darters and catfishes (particularly
     madtoms).
Bluntnose minnow
Golden redhorse
Yellow bullhead
Longear sunfish
Redfin darter
Spotted bass
Orangespotted sunfish
Blackside darter
Madtoms
1    Key species:  normally the dominant species within important groups such as families or
     trophic levels.
2    Indicator species:  a species  readily associated with a  specific  type  of ecosystem;  is not
     necessarily dominant.

                                                                               (Continued)
                                            86

-------
Table 4-2. Summary of Arkansas'  Descriptions of  Fish Communities  in  Reference Streams
           (Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology 1988).   In all ecoregions,
           streams are  to support diverse communities of indigenous or adapted species of fish
           and other forms of aquatic life.  (Continued)
Ecoregion
 Kev Species
Indicator Species
(d)  Quachita Mountains - Characterized
     by a major proportion of sensitive
     species;  a minnow- and  sunfish-
     dominated community exists, followed
     by darters.
Bigeye shiner
Northern hogsucker
Freckled madtom
Longear sunfish
Orangebelly darter
Smallmouth bass
Shadow bass
Gravel chub
Northern studfish
(e)   Typical Southcentral Plains - Charac-
     terized by a limited proportion of
     sensitive species; sunfishes are
     distinctly dominant, followed by
     darters and minnows.
Redfin shiner
Spotted sucker
Yellow bullhead
Flier
Slough darter
Grass pickerel
Pirate perch
Warmouth
Spotted sunfish
Dusky darter
Creek chubsucker
Banded pygmy sunfish
(f)   Springwater-influenced Southcentral      Redfin shiner
     Plains - Characterized by a substantial    Blacktail redhorse
     proportion of sensitive species; sunfishes  Freckled madtom
     normally dominate the community,       Longear sunfish
     followed by darters and minnows.        Creole darter
                                             Grass pickerel
(g)  Least-altered Mississippi Alluvial
     Plains - Characterized by an insignifi-
     cant proportion of sensitive species;
     sunfishes are distinctly dominant,
     followed by minnows.
Ribbon shiner
Smallmouth buffalo
Yellow bullhead
Bluegill
Bluntnose darter
Pirate perch
Golden redhorse
Spotted bass
Scaly sand darter
Striped shiner
Banded pygmy sunfish

Pugnose minnow
Mosquitofish
Pirate  perch
Tadpole madtom
Banded pygmy sunfish
 1    Key species:  normally the dominant species within important groups such as families or
     trophic levels.
 2    Indicator species:   a species readily  associated with a specific type  of  ecosystem; is not
     necessarily dominant.

                                                                                (Continued)
                                             87

-------
Table 4-2. Summary of  Arkansas'  Descriptions  of Fish Communities  in Reference Streams
           (Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology  1988).  In  all ecoregions,
           streams are  to support diverse communities of indigenous  or adapted  species of fish
           and  other forms of aquatic life.  (Continued)
Ecoresion

(h)  Channel-altered Mississippi Alluvial
     Plain - Characterized by an absence
     of sensitive species; sunfishes and
     minnows dominate the community,
     followed by catfishes.
Key Species1

 Blacktail shiner
 Drum
 Common carp
 Channel catfish
 Green sunfish
 Spotted  gar
Indicator Species2

Mosquitofish
Gizzard shad
Emerald shiner
1    Key species:   normally the dominant species within important groups such as families or
     trophic levels.
2    Indicator species:  a  species readily associated with a specific type  of  ecosystem;  is not
     necessarily dominant.
                                             88

-------
    For the development  of biological criteria, the Ohio EPA relied on the composition and
relative abundance of macroinvertebrate and fish assemblages.  Indices of ecological health were
calculated by combining species abundance data by site with trophic guild, pollution tolerance, and
ecological information about the species.  Three indices were  used; two of these, the Index of
Biotic Integrity (IBI) and the modified Index of Well-Being (IWB),  are based on fish assemblages;
the third,  the  Invertebrate  Community Index (ICI),  was  derived  from  macroinvertebrate
assemblages. The IBI was  modified from Karr's Index of Biotic Integrity (Karr et al. 1986), and
the IWB was a modification of Gammon's work (Gammon 1976, 1980; Gammon et al. 1981). The
Ohio  EPA   applied  the  ecological principles used  in  the  IBI  and  IWB to  develop  the
macroinvertebrate ICI (Ohio Environmental Protection Agency 1987b).  The regional reference data
were used to establish expected values of each  index for each region and for each aquatic life use
for which biocriteria were established.
    Ecoregional criteria were  established  for the warmwater habitat class  at the 25th percentile
value of the reference site data for each ecoregion for each index.  Criteria for  the exceptional
warmwater  habitat class were established at the 75th percentile, based on a statewide assessment
of data from reference streams; these latter criteria were not established on a regional basis.  In
addition, modified warmwater habitat criteria were established for some streams whose physical
habitats had been altered,  particularly  by channelization, impoundments, or  nonacidic  mine
drainage, to such an extent that the expected Warmwater Habitat use could not be realistically
attained, but these streams could support some semblance of a Warmwater Habitat community.
Two biocriteria were established for this class,  one for the sites in the Huron/Erie  Lake Plain, and
one for the sites in the remainder of the state. The criteria were the 25th percentile values of
representative sites in each area.
     Aquatic life use attainment in Ohio streams is assessed primarily on  the basis of biological
monitoring; in other words, the ability of a waterbody to  achieve the biocriteria.  The significance
of  any observation of non-attainment is based on  the  magnitude of departure from the regional
criterion (e.g.,  within four IBI units of the ecoregion criterion)  and the distance downstream over
which  the  departure is sustained.   Generally,  attainment  of  warmwater  habitat  and modified
warmwater habitat is achieved when all three of the biocriteria (IBI, ICI, and IWB) have been met.
If only one or two index  values are met, the  use is  partially attained.  Non-attainment is based
on failure of all indices to meet the applicable criteria. An example of regional biological criteria
is given in Table 4-3.  Assessing use attainment is discussed in more detail in Subsection 4.3.2.

4.2.3  Minnesota

     The Minnesota Pollution Control Agency has focused efforts on the protection and restoration
of lake water quality because lakes are a prime recreational resource  in that state.  The  Agency
has used an ecoregional framework to summarize existing lake chemistry data in order to derive
appropriate achievable regional goals and criteria for  lake quality.  The framework has  proven
                                              89

-------
Table 4-3. Biocriteria for streams in the Proposed Ohio Water Quality Standards Regulations (Ohio
           Environmental Protection Agency 1987b).  This example is based on Karr's Index of
           Biotic Integrity, and is an illustration of the way the Ohio EPA established biocriteria.
Index of Biotic
Integrity (Fish)
A. Wading Sites1
Huron/Erie
Lake Plain
Interior Plateau
Erie/Ontario
Lake Plain
Western Allegheny
Plateau
Eastern Corn
Belt Plains
B. Boat Sites1
Huron/Erie
Lake Plain
Interior Plateau
Erie/Ontario
Lake Plain
Western Allegheny
Plateau
Eastern Corn
Belt Plains
Modified Warmwater Habitat
Channel Mod. Mine Affected Impounded

22
28
28
28 26
28

22 24
26 30
26 30
26 24 30
26 30
Warmwater Habitat

32
36
38
42
40

34
38
36
38
42
1 Sampling methods descriptions are found  in the Ohio  EPA Manual  of Surveillance  Methods
  and Quality Assurance Practices (Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Division of Wastewater
   Pollution Control, 1983).
                                                                               (Continued)
                                            90

-------
Table 4-3. Biocriteria for streams in the Proposed Ohio Water Quality Standards Regulations (Ohio
           Environmental Protection Agency 1987b). This example is based  on Karr's Index of
           Biotic Integrity, and is an illustration of the way the Ohio EPA established biocriteria.
           (Continued)
Index of Biotic
Integrity (Fish)
        Modified Warmwater Habitat
Channel Mod.  Mine Affected   Impounded
                                                                      Warmwater Habitat
C.  Headwaters Sites1
    Huron/Erie
    Lake Plain
    Interior Plateau
      22
      26
32
40
Erie/Ontario
Lake Plain
Western Allegheny
Plateau
Eastern Corn
Belt Plains
26
26 26
26
40
40
40
    Sampling methods descriptions are found in the Ohio EPA Manual of Surveillance Methods
    and Quality Assurance Practices  (Ohio Environmental Protection  Agency,  Division of
    Waste water Pollution Control, 1983).
                                             91

-------
valuable in organizing and  interpreting  landscape and water quality data.  The key concern has
been lake phosphorus and lake attributes that are influenced by elevated levels of phosphorus.
A summary of the results of the Agency's effort, including water quality goals and criteria,  is
provided in Subsection 4.3.3.

4.3 WATER BODY MONITORING, ASSESSMENT, AND REPORTING

    An ecoregional framework has also been effectively used to support the U.S. EPA's efforts
to assess the status and extent of water  quality problems.  Specifically, the framework has been
used for (1)  designing survey programs, (2) conducting  direct assessments of aquatic life use
attainment, and of  the status and extent of water  quality problems, and  (3)  synthesizing and
interpreting water quality monitoring data, as required by Sections  305(b), 314, and 319 of the
WQA.

4.3.1  Monitoring Design

    The ecoregional framework is useful in two broad areas of monitoring program  design. The
first area is the monitoring of water resources  to determine the attainable or achievable quality
in a particular region.  Examples  are discussed in Section 4.2 and  are not repeated here.  The
second area pertains to developing unbiased estimates of the status of water quality resources with
known  precision (such as  the  fraction  of lakes or streams in  a  particular  area  that  meet a
particular environmental  criterion).
    Traditionally, water  quality agencies have  relied on an enumerative process to  quantify the
extent of water quality problems and water body use impairment. The goal of this  process is  to
identify and list water bodies that  are impaired. An estimate of status and extent of impairment
in an area is obtained by totaling  the extent  (lengths for streams, area for lakes and reservoirs)
of the  impaired systems, or  by mapping  the spatial distribution of impaired systems.  As presently
practiced, this  method lacks statistical rigor; that is, the status of the resources of interest cannot
be specified with known confidence or  precision.
    An alternate, statistically sound, survey  design  has been developed as part of  the mandate
to assess, with known precision, the status of lakes and streams, relative to sensitivity to acidic
deposition, and to estimate  the number that are already acidic.  This design adopts an inferential
process that relies on estimating population characteristics by sampling subsets of the population.
Specifying the population of interest and randomly  sampling  (systematic random,  or  stratified
systematic  random)  that  population is the  basis for  making statistically sound  inferences about
status and extent with known precision.
    Although  a  purely  random  process for  site  selection can  be used  in survey designs,
stratification of the population of interest into subpopulations of greater homogeneity can increase
the precision of estimates for the same sampling resources. For estimating the quality of resources
                                             92

-------
that exhibit spatial patterns (e.g., water quality), a geographic stratification into areas of greater
homogeneity efficiently focuses sampling.  The use of a geographically stratified random sampling
design formed the basis of assessment of surface water sensitivity to acidic deposition nationwide.
A brief  description of the sampling  design for  one part of the country  is  detailed below  to
illustrate the process.
    The National Lake Survey was designed by the U.S. EPA to assess the chemical status of lakes
in areas  of low alkalinity  in the United States, in order to estimate the number and percentage
of lakes sensitive to acidic  deposition or already exhibiting acidic conditions (Linthurst et al. 1986;
Landers  et al. 1987).  The sampling design was constructed so that results could be extrapolated
to the population of lakes in the areas of interest.  Several levels of geographic  stratification were
used  to establish sampling strata from which a random sample of lakes could be  drawn.  The
population was defined as  those lakes  in areas (regions) of the United States where a majority of
lakes  have alkalinities of less than 400 /jeq/L.  The first level of stratification consisted of regions
having relative homogeneity in lake type and in physiographic characteristics affecting lake type,
such  as continental glaciation, alpine  glaciation, and karst topography, and included  portions of
the Upper Midwest, Northeast, and Southeast United States. The second level of stratification was
established by identifying  areas (subregions) within each region that were relatively homogeneous
in  combinations of factors affecting  differences in lake quality, such as lake  size and type,
physiography,  vegetation,  climate, and soils.  Five subregions were delineated in the Northeast,
four  in the Upper  Midwest, and two in the Southeast United States.  This level of regionalization
was used to ensure that representative samples were obtained from each environmentally distinct
area.   The third level of stratification  consisted of alkalinity map  classes, within each subregion,
derived  from regional alkalinity maps (Omernik  and Griffith 1986; Omernik  and Kinney 1985)
and based on the expected range of dominant surface water alkalinity values.
     Within  each of these strata,  the population of  lakes  was limited to those appearing  on
l:250,000-scale U.S.  Geological Survey topographic  maps.  The lakes were first  enumerated and
labelled, then a systematic sample  (with a random start) was selected for field  sampling to insure
that  each  lake within the population had an equal  probability of selection.   This  selection  was
refined by eliminating nontarget®  lakes.
     The regional/subregional classification, combined with the systematic  random sampling of
lakes, allowed population  estimates to be made with  known precision by  characterizing sample
lakes. This sampling design has the potential for addressing many  other questions about the status
and extent of  aquatic resource quality.  For example, it can be used to estimate the number or
percentage of lakes in a region that are eutrophic or that exceed certain phosphorus levels, or to
estimate the percentage of streams having aquatic life  uses that are impaired  or attained.
     6 Nontarget lakes include lakes in urban or industrial areas, lakes less than the specified 4
       ha minimum, and lakes inaccurately represented on the  l:250,000-scale topographic maps
       (e.g., no  lake  actually present  on the ground, or the lake  is  actually flowing water, a
       swamp, or a bay/estuary).
                                              93

-------
    Some researchers believe that a systematic grid is a more appropriate sampling scheme for
certain  environmental studies.   Preliminary regionalization  of the interest  area  can help  to
distinguish the degree  of environmental variability  within and among  regions  and,  thus,  the
appropriate coarseness for a sampling grid.  Sites will then be  located close enough together to
represent all  important  environmental conditions in the data set.

4.3.2  Assessment of Aquatic Life Use Attainment

    Comparing existing chemical conditions with chemical criteria is an indirect way of assessing
aquatic life use attainment, important for understanding how potential impairment might be caused
by suspected chemical pollution. Aquatic life  use attainment can also be assessed directly.  One
way is to establish quantitative biocriteria against which existing conditions can be compared.  A
second way is to  compare existing conditions with those at several reference sites. Traditionally,
this latter method is the upstream/downstream analysis of suspected impairment caused by point
source discharges. However,  this approach can be  broadened to include reference watersheds or
reference sites in similar watersheds.   Results from many of these comparisons could be used as
a basis  for establishing biocriteria.  A third way is to compare ambient conditions against the
predictions of well-verified mathematical models. All these methods  can provide  quantitative
statements about the status  of a water  body  and the extent  to which an aquatic life  use is
impaired.  In the examples  that follow, a  regional framework has been used to facilitate the
application of the first  and second methods for direct assessment of aquatic life use attainment.

4.3.2.1  Ohio—

    As described earlier, the Ohio EPA used  an ecoregional framework to establish biocriteria
that differed among  the ecoregions in that state.  These regional biocriteria have been used in the
assessment  of use impairment as part of the  Ohio EPA's ongoing monitoring and assessment
program. An example of one  such  study demonstrates  the application  of the process for site
specific assessments.
    A warmwater habitat stream, located in the Erie/Ontario Lake Plain Ecoregion, receives point
source discharges  (Figure 4-2; Ohio Environmental Protection Agency 1987b).   Each graph in
Figure 4-2 indicates various levels of attainment of each index. Chemical pollution sources are
indicated at  the  top of the  figure; the X-axis indicates river  kilometers.  The  lines trace the
longitudinal  profile  of  the  index values along the stream.  In this case, above  the sources  of
chemical pollution, the  stream attains its regional Warmwater Habitat biocriteria (i.e., 40 for the
IBI, 8.0 for the IWB, and 36 for the ICI).  Below the discharges, impairment is seen in each index,
followed by movement toward recovery.  Note that the indices respond slightly differently.  The
IBI and  the IWB indicate a steady trend toward  recovery, whereas the ICI indicates a trend toward
recovery followed by possible further degradation.
                                             94

-------
                                     I     I    I
                               14   12   10   8
                                                   i    i     r
                                                  642
0
                                       River  Kilometer
Figure 4-2.   Illustration of how the Ohio Environmental Protection Agency (1987b) uses biocriteria
             to interpret the significance of an environmental impact.  Chemical pollution sources
             are  indicated by arrows at the  top of the figure.  The stream is designated as
             warmwater habitat and is located in the Erie/Ontario Lake Plain Ecoregion; applicable
             biocriteria are indicated by the dashed horizontal lines.

                                            95

-------
    The Ohio  EPA also  assessed how well aquatic  life use impairments based  on biocriteria
compared with those based on chemical criteria for  431 stream segments (Ohio Environmental
Protection  Agency,  Division  of Water Quality  Monitoring and  Assessment 1988).   Ambient
chemistry from grab samples  collected  for a single  year  (usually the summer  months) were
compared with the chemical criteria to assess  chemical impairment.  The biotic integrity indices
were generated for the same streams in the same year and compared with the biocriteria values
established for  each  of the ecoregions to assess use impairment directly. Used in the comparison
were temperature, conventional chemicals (e.g.,  dissolved oxygen, ammonia, chlorine, nitrate-
nitrogen,  nitrite-nitrogen), conventional  metals (e.g.,  copper,  cadmium,  zinc,  lead, nickel,
chromium), and other inorganic chemicals  known to be problems in certain areas of the state (e.g.,
arsenic). Criteria are from the Ohio Water Quality Standards (Ohio Administration  Code 3745-
1, 1987).  Impairment was assessed based on the combination of the frequency and magnitude of
criteria exceedence.
    Three levels  of use impairment were established for both the chemical and biological criteria:
full attainment, partial attainment, and non-attainment.  See the  Ohio EPA, Division of Water
Quality Monitoring  and Assessment 1988 305(b) Report for a description of the chemical and
biological assessment procedures  used to assign full attainment, partial attainment,  or non-
attainment to a stream segment.  A summary of the results of these assessments is given in Table
4-4.  The  diagonal  elements  of the matrix show the percentage of cases in  which there was
agreement between chemical and biological methods;  an overall agreement of 46% is indicated.
    The other elements of the matrix indicate  the  cases in which assessments  conflict.  For
example, in 35%  of the cases, a chemical assessment indicated  full attainment but  a  biological
assessment indicated partial  attainment  or non-attainment.  In  nearly  half  of these cases,
impairments were due to  habitat or flow modifications,  or silt.  These kinds of impairments are
not detected by chemical  assessment.
    The Ohio EPA's statewide assessment of aquatic life  use attainment in streams was previously
based on chemical surveys.   Recent  reports  rely on results of biosurveys.  The difference in
reported stream kilometers attaining aquatic life uses can be substantial, as the above example
indicates; based on  chemical  surveys,  52% of the  stream segments would be assessed as fully
attaining aquatic  life uses, whereas based on biosurveys, only 23% have full attainment.

4.3.2.2  Montana--

    Hughes (1985) used regional reference  sites to  examine the  impacts of sediments and heavy
metals on the biota  of streams in the  metal mining district of southwestern Montana.  Because
appropriate upstream reference  sites  were lacking,  the experimental  design  incorporated  the
selection of reference watersheds similar  to the impaired watersheds in regional characteristics,
such as land-surface form, climate, soil, vegetation, and land use.  Three impaired sites were
chosen for assessment, and three  reference sites were selected for comparison with each of the
                                            96

-------
Table 4-4.  The Ohio Environmental Protection Agency's (Ohio Environmental Protection Agency,
           Division of Water Quality Monitoring and Assessment 1988) Comparison of Percent
           of Stream Segments Attaining Aquatic Life Uses, Based on Biosurvey and In-stream
           Chemical Data
Chemical
Attainment
                          Full
 Biosurvey Attainment
Partial
Non-
Total
Full
Partial
Non-
Total
17
2
4
23
18
1
6
25
17
6
28
52
52
9
39

Rows indicate full attainment, partial attainment, or non-attainment based on in-stream chemistry;
columns indicate attainment based on biosurveys (n = 431 stream segments).  For example, based
on a chemical assessment, 52% of the segments fully attained aquatic life uses; only 23% achieved
full use attainment  based on biosurveys.  The  two types of assessment agreed on full attainment
in 17% of the cases.
                                            97

-------
impaired sites.  Reference and impaired streams were sampled  once during the late summer to
characterize and compare aquatic life (fishes and macroinvertebrates), water quality, and physical
habitat.  The results indicated  the extent to which the streams were impaired.  Conclusions were
that chemical and physical  habitats were  disrupted at  the  impacted sites, and  that  the  mere
presence of trout  in impaired  sites was an insufficient measure of ecological integrity for  these
sites.  That  is,  even  though trout  were  present  at the impaired sites,  there  were significant
differences among the biotic assemblages (fish and macroinvertebrates) relative to reference sites,
indicating  that the impaired segments did not achieve the attainable quality for this area.

4.3.2.3  Colorado—

     Fausch and Schrader (1987) modified Karr's Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI) to assess the biotic
integrity along various sections of the Cache la Poudre River, Big Thompson River, and St. Vrain
Creek  in northeastern Colorado (western part of the Western High  Plains Ecoregion).   They
sampled these streams from 1980 to 1986, collecting in  the  urban areas, in the transition  zone,
and downstream into  the plains.  They calibrated the index for  streams in this  portion of the
South Platte River Basin by  examining data on fish collections obtained in other surveys.  These
surveys included collections at sites that were minimally impaired compared to the rest of the
basin.
     Fausch  and  Schrader concluded  that IBI  scores in the stream reaches they sampled were
within the fair  to poor range, with a general  decline in the downstream direction.  They also
concluded  that point source discharges at Ft. Collins had no detectable effect on the  measured
biotic integrity in the receiving reaches of the Cache la Poudre River.  They noted that habitat
alterations, especially channelization, markedly reduced biotic integrity.
     Fausch  and Schrader did not conduct their study specifically to determine whether aquatic
life uses were attained.  Nonetheless, their results can be discussed within that framework.  The
IBI  scale  includes categories  that  are good and excellent.  Because  the IBI  was regionally
calibrated, these  categories  may represent attainable  conditions.   The  scores in  the good to
excellent range could be defined as biological criteria that specify  the attainment of a warmwater
fishery use, as Ohio EPA has done. Biotic integrity of all reaches in the Fausch-Schrader  study
fell into the fair to poor range  on this scale, indicating possible widespread use impairment.  More
severe impairment occurred in the reaches affected by physical habitat modifications.

4.3.3 Synthesis and Reporting of Water Quality Monitoring  Data

     Minnesota has used an ecoregion  framework for more assessment applications than any other
state.  The Minnesota Pollution Control Agency has found  the ecoregional framework to be a
convenient and  effective way to  organize, present, and  interpret  lake and stream water quality
information. This framework has been used in several congressionally mandated reports (e.g., as
                                             98

-------
required by WQA Sections 305(b), 314 [clean lakes], and 319 [nonpoint sources]) and also as the
organizational basis for several reports and presentations made to the public at scientific meetings.
A number of publications should be consulted for greater detail (Heiskary  1989; Heiskary and
Walker, Jr.  1988;  Heiskary and Wilson 1988; Heiskary et al. 1987; Minnesota Pollution Control
Agency  1986a, 1986b,  1986c, 1988a, 1988b, 1989; Wilson 1989; Wilson and Walker, Jr. 1989).
The Agency adopted the ecoregional boundaries  as outlined by Omernik (1987a) to summarize
large amounts of  existing lake  and stream chemistry data.   As the data were summarized and
interpreted, this framework became useful for deriving regionally achievable lake quality goals and
criteria.   Equally important  has been its use for communicating with  the  public  about water
quality status, achievable goals, and identification of high quality resources  needing protection.
The framework has  also proven  valuable  in organizing  and interpreting landscape and water
quality data.  The key concern has  been lake phosphorus and lake attributes that are influenced
by elevated levels of phosphorus.  To demonstrate  the wide variety of applications, we  have
organized a synthesis of the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency's efforts along the  topics of (1)
ecoregion characterization,  (2) water body characterization, (3) water quality  characterization and
attainable quality, (4) lake  phosphorus modeling, and (5) implications for management.

4.3.3.1  Ecoregion Characterization—

      The Minnesota Pollution  Control Agency combined several existing state data bases and
developed more detailed descriptions of the  seven ecoregions occurring  in Minnesota than were
originally  provided by Omernik and Gallant (1988), in order to  aid in data interpretation and
environmental management.  One data base summarized land characteristics and was  organized
by  the  Land Management  Information  Center.   Aerial photography coverage  for 1968-1969,
augmented by other  sources, was used to characterize the 16-ha parcels of land included in this
data base.   The  Land Management Information Center also aggregated these data  by minor
 watersheds. The Minnesota Pollution Control Agency summarized the minor watershed data within
each ecoregion to characterize the ecoregion as a whole, as well as describe those parts typical  of
 each  region and those  parts  transitional in nature.   Precipitation  data from  the Minnesota
 Department of Natural Resources and flow data from the U.S. Geological Survey were also used.
 Another data source summarized land use changes that had occurred since the survey done by the
 Land Management Information Center.   The ecoregions could  be characterized  by data that
 included land use, water orientation, water quantity, precipitation, soil texture and hydrologic
 group, slope, and population characteristics.
       Water orientation refers to whether or not a 16-ha parcel of land borders a water body. The
 category no surface water indicates that no surface water resources are associated with that parcel;
 stream  oriented  indicates that a stream crosses or borders a parcel  and lake oriented refers to a
 parcel that includes  a lake shoreline.  The water category includes parcels that are primarily lake
 or  wetland.
                                              99

-------
      Major differences were seen in some of these characteristics across Minnesota's ecoregions.
 The greatest differences occurred between regions to the north (the Northern Lakes and Forests
 and Northern Minnesota Wetlands Ecoregions) and regions to the south (the Western Corn Belt
 Plains and Northern Glaciated Plains Ecoregions), as summarized in Figure 4-3.

 4.3.3.2 Water Body Characterization—

      The distribution of number, type, and quality of lakes differs among  ecoregions.  Of the
 seven ecoregions occurring in Minnesota,  only the Northern Lakes and Forests, North Central
 Hardwood Forests, Western Corn  Belt Plains, and  Northern Glaciated Plains should be considered
 as  lake regions,  as 98% of  the state's lakes occur in these four ecoregions.  The density and
 characteristics of the lakes vary regionally.  In the Northern Lakes and Forests Ecoregion, lakes
 are generally small, deep, and stratified, whereas in the Northern Glaciated Plains they are large,
 shallow, and unstratified (Figures 4-4 and 4-5).

 4.3.3.3 Water Quality Characterization--

     Data collected from streams and lakes as part of the Minnesota Pollution Control  Agency's
 ongoing water quality assessment program have been analyzed using an ecoregional framework.
 Lake quality data were obtained over the period from 1977 to 1987 and focus primarily on water
 quality variables  of importance to lake trophic  state  (e.g., phosphorus, Secchi disk transparency,
 and chlorophyll a).  For streams,  a broad array of chemical attributes was  assessed from 1965 to
 1987  as part of the Agency's  routine  ambient  stream monitoring  network.   Although  the
 ecoregional  framework has been  used to organize and interpret both lake and stream data,  the
 design of the monitoring program was not initially based on the framework, and the streams and
 lakes do not represent reference conditions. As a result of the regional assessments and a desire
 to identify  attainable water quality, both  the stream and lake  programs  have recently shifted
 emphases  to explicitly identify and sample least impacted water bodies.
     The  lake monitoring program incorporates  the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency's routine
 efforts, those of other agencies,  and a public lake monitoring effort.  These endeavors have
 provided a data base of more than 1400 lakes. A second monitoring effort focuses on a reference
set of lakes  representative of the ecoregions and least  impacted by point and nonpoint sources  of
pollution.  Several  of these lakes  have been monitored for several years to assess natural yearly
variability.  This  monitoring effort is limited to lakes in the four lake ecoregions.  An ecoregional
framework is being  used  to  summarize and present the data collected from  these monitoring
programs  and interpret the data relative to management needs.
     Figure 4-6 displays the regional differences in lake quality  based on the reference data. As
expected,  and consistent with the patterns seen  for streams, the ecoregional framework accounts
for a substantial part of the variation.  Some of the remaining  within-region  variation can be
                                            100

-------


Northern
Minnesota
Wetlands


Northern
Lakes
and
Forests





North
Central
Hardwood
Forests




Driftless
Area


100-
80-
60-
40-
20-
Q
1OO-,
80-
60-
40 -

20-

Q
1OO-
80-
60-
4O-

2O-
Q
100-
80-
60-
40-
20-
n


w

"•.
G



ft.

^
%
n
-E, 5

E
*
<,
•.«
i1
^£^TT1 	 !


P
pi ^
I ] *
ri j PI ^
hsr rH \—i w


r
f5 I t^
^rr™
U!i3
J.,.!.,.ca~ ,
                                                       Red River
                                                        Valley 40_
                                                       Northern 60-
                                                       Glaciated
                                                        Plains
                                                        Western 60-
                                                       Corn Belt
                                                        Plains
                    Land
                           Water   Median
                    Use   Orientation  Slope
       UJ
 Soil   Precip-
Texture  itation
                                          (%)
                                                 (cm)
Figure 4-3.  Summary of characteristics in regionally representative areas in Minnesota ecoregions.

              Precipitation is  summarized by entire region (Minnesota Pollution Control Agency

              1989).
                                                  101

-------
960-
800-
cvP
^. 640-

o
CD
< 480-















1 ( W
T
^










*










1
x" 1
I
i 24-
'i
£ 18~
Q.

Q
| 12-

E
X
o
;> _
1

	 :c 	 -L ""•

Ui
Q)
^ *• 2
n-nrJ JfJ _(..,


o
F o S
5^ "g

•*-
c
a
c_

• --Median §
 i- o
II fl I! !^ ^1 !!
                                                                                   - o
                                                                                   X
                                                                                          ha.
             Figure 4-4.   Boxplots of regional differences in surface area and maximum depth for Minnesota

                          lakes (adapted from Heiskary and Wilson 1988).
_
                                                        102

-------
   100-i


    80-


£  60 H
o

o>  40-


    20-


      0'
                    CO
                      CO
                   — CD
                      i_
                   c o
                   v- U_
                   CD
                           co

                        	 CO
                        O 
-------
                                     182
3 80~
fiO

^^^
CL
o 40-

JC,
O 20-


n-
-1 250-,
o>
3 200-
in
? 150-
0
x:
S" 100-
o
k- 50-

O

O Q

JL_10— J
Relative-
Sample Size



*
I T

T 1
1 •
• 1 	 1 	

1 1 1
47'
T .
1


T U-
1
T . 1
1 . i 	 .,
1*1 -u

1 1 1
w to •«- x>
2 « "5 ^
o-£ "a co GO a
-1 £ - o co
V- C 1 1 _, ^- CO O C
££ 3^ O.E c5-^
fl rl |-|»
ss I 1
50-n
40-

Q- -,^
i_ 30-

Z on
r- 2°

10-



*
6-
1 5-
^ 4-
Q.
• /I)
Q 3-
Z 2-

-
1 1 1
tf) to *- T3
CD "*~ rt^ CD
>-^ (/> — t/) CLJ
o w 2 ^ CD a
-l CD *; o c "o
c o S1^ o c — c
^U. o-g 0-- &•-
^| £§ EE gE
z ^"2 « £
O CD >-
1 3: 5
Figure 4-6.   Regional differences in lake water quality in Minnesota based on a survey of least
             impacted lakes (Heiskary 1989).
                                            104

-------
accounted for spatially, by creating subregions (Omernik et al. 1988).  In addition, the data base
can be subdivided by categories to investigate other possible sources of  variation, such as lake
depth, mixing regime, lake type (seepage vs. drainage), or other factors.   Figure 4-7 shows an
example  of variation in lake total phosphorus within ecoregions associated with fishery ecological
class.
     The Minnesota  Pollution  Control Agency also related citizen user perceptions of lake quality
to the chemical measurements.  User perceptions were assessed  on a scale of from one to five
through a questionnaire that ranked quality by lake physical appearance, ranging from crystal clear
to dense algal blooms, and recreational suitability, ranging from beautiful, could not be nicer to
no recreation possible because of algae levels.  Water quality measurements for total phosphorus,
Secchi disk transparency, and chlorophyll a were obtained at the same time the questionnaire
survey was conducted.  Results summarized  the frequency distributions that related questionnaire
scores with water quality characteristics. Figure  4-8 shows one such comparison for Secchi disk
transparency.  Significant regional differences were seen in user perception of impairment. For
example, water  bodies perceived as no swimming or high or severe algae in the Northern  Lakes
and  Forests Ecoregion have transparencies ranging from one to two  meters. This compares with
typical transparencies of 2.5  to 4.2  m  found in  reference  lakes (Figure 4-6)  in this region.
However, in  the Western Corn Belt Plains Ecoregion,  the perception  of  the same level  of
impairment occurred at  transparencies of 0.3 to 0.9 m, where typical transparencies are 0.5 to 1
m at  reference  lakes.   Water quality  that is acceptable  in the Western Corn Belt  Plains is
apparently unacceptable in the Northern Lakes and Forests.
     The results of these citizen surveys  and  their relationship  to  measured   lake quality
characteristics have  been incorporated by the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency into the process
of setting goals  and  criteria and assessing attainment of designated lake uses. For instance,  a case
can  be  made   that  use  impairment occurs at  higher transparencies  (lower  phosphorus and
chlorophyll a levels) in the Northern Lakes and Forests than in the Western Corn Belt Plains.
Thus, management  goals should reflect these regional  differences.
     For analyzing existing stream data, the Agency established criteria for the selection of sites
to be  included  in the regional assessment.  These criteria were:  (1) at least four  years of data
must be available,  (2) data must have been collected  monthly for at least nine months, and (3)
streams must be reasonably representative of their ecoregions. As a result, 149 stream monitoring
stations  were selected.  Stream temperature, pH, conductivity, total  suspended solids, turbidity,
nitrate/nitrite nitrogen, ammonia,  total phosphorus, 5-day BOD, and fecal coliform were analyzed
for three different time  intervals:  1965-1970, 1980-1985, and the entire 20-year period. Analysis
of stream data was  divided into two phases. All streams  meeting the three criteria were used in
one  phase.   These  streams were  impacted to  varying degrees, reflecting the  range of  human
influences present in each region.  In the other phase of analysis, a subset of less impacted streams
(relative  to  the others)  were  selected to estimate attainable quality and  conditions for each
ecoregion.  This first cut at attainable quality can  be  refined as  the monitoring program is
modified to include streams that are  selected specifically with minimal impact as a criterion.

                                             105

-------




240-

^ 200-
_J
01
^ 160-
o
Q.
g 120-
Q_
o
- 80-
V-J
40-

Northern Lakes




1

cc
1
and
Forests





•-


1

. .




— I
a>
•-*


















—Median g

1 25
> s
O 0> -^






I

i
}\

9
I 1
Q> Q>

l- — O — —







i

•
i
i
.c
CO

c
o
CL















I
-
I
1
sz
CO

L
j

L.
31









Central
Hardwood
Forests














{
1




|

a>

o




























•
J

1
JZ
CO


**-
c
o
0.
424














i







•

















--

Western Corn Belt
Plains and Northern
Glaciated Plains
373















, 1










1
-



•








i
O> (O tO

Lu ȣ iZ
x: ox:
o> n en
                                                <=
                                            -    o
                                                m
                                                     CO
                                                     CO
                                                     o
                                                     m
o
cc
to
to
o
m
                               to
                               a
                              m
                                                                a
                                                                CL

                                                                to
                                                                to
                                                                o
                                                                CO
              Figure 4-7.   Boxplots of total phosphorus concentrations by fishery ecological class in Minnesota

                            ecoregions (Heiskary and Wilson 1988).
_
                                                            106

-------
             4.0-


             3.6-


             3.2-


             2.8-


             2.4-
        Q
        ._   2.0 H
        JZ
         o
         o
        (?)   1.6-
             1.2-


             0.8-


             0.4-
             0.0
                      Northern  Lakes
                        and  Forests
       •75th Percentile

       Median

       •25th Percentile
     No Swimming
jnrjTjj High or Severe
     Algae
     Transparencies
     in each Region
Western  Corn
  Belt Plains
Figure 4-8.  Correspondence between user perception and measured lake quality in Minnesota

           ecoregions (adapted from Heiskary 1989). Typical transparencies are for least impaired

           reference lakes representative of each region (interquartile range from Figure 4-6).
                                       107

-------
     Published reports illustrate the results of both of these analyses with a variety of box plots,
 graphs,  and tabular summaries organized  by ecoregion.   We include summaries to show the
 differences among  the  stream attributes across  regions (Figure 4-9)  and the important trends
 identified in the data analysis (Table 4-5).  An initial estimate of attainable stream water quality
 appears  in Table 4-6.
     All of the stream  water  quality variables  show some differences among ecoregions.   In
 general, water quality differences reflect major land differences  between  regions to the north
 (Northern Minnesota Wetlands and Northern Lakes and  Forests) and those to the south (Western
 Corn Belt Plains and Northern Glaciated Plains).  Some variables reflect little influence of human
 activities (e.g., conductivity, temperature, and pH), but relate to natural  landscape and  climatic
 patterns. Other variables reflect a combination of human activities and landscape patterns (e.g.,
 total suspended solids, nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen, total phosphorus and turbidity).  The nitrate/nitrite
 values in the Western Corn Belt  Plains  are exceptionally high relative  to the values in other
 regions,  probably reflecting increases in nitrogen fertilizers used for row crop production in that
 region and extensive use of tile drainage systems.  Some  variables reflect mainly human activities
 (e.g., total ammonia,  fecal  coliforms, and  5-day BOD), and relate to patterns in point source
 discharges and cattle densities (including feedlots) that also follow ecoregional patterns.
     Trends in important variables influenced by human activities are highlighted by a  regional
 presentation.  For example, a significant increase in  nitrate/nitrite-nitrogen has occurred in the
 Driftless  Area and  Northern Glaciated Plains  Ecoregions,  whereas a decrease  has apparently
 occurred in the North Central Hardwood Forests (though  not statistically detectable). For  total
 suspended solids, significant increases are seen in the North Central Hardwood Forests, Red River
 Valley and Western  Corn Belt Plains  Ecoregions  (Table 4-5).

 4.3.3.4  Lake  Phosphorus Modeling—

     The  Minnesota Pollution Control  Agency  also  uses three  lake phosphorus  models  for
 quantitative estimates and prediction of lake  trophic state.  These  require increasingly  detailed
 data, from regional  to site specific, as inputs for the  models, with  presumably the more  detailed
 models providing increasingly more accurate outputs.  The models  are  used for various levels  of
assessment of  lake quality and projected response to management action. The most general model
 uses regionally defined coefficients derived from  the studies outlined in Subsection 4.3.3.  It links
water outflow and phosphorus supply equations with  a lake phosphorus mass balance model and
empirical models that relate lake  phosphorus to transparency and chlorophyll a.  The values,
summarized in Table 4-7, are used in two equations for calculating water outflow and phosphorus
supply to a lake.  An empirical mass balance model is used to calculate in-lake phosphorus levels
that would result from these water and phosphorus loadings.  The  equations are:
                                             108

-------
               0.3 -i
    Total      02_
Phosphorus
  (mg/L)     0.1 H
               0.0
                                m   m
        N03 and N02  1.0 •
           (mg/L)     o.5
                        0.0-1-

800^
600-
Conductivity 40Q _
{/xmhos) 200-
r\
u
50^
Total 40-
Suspended 30-
Solids 20-
(mg/L) 10-
Turbidity 1°~
(NTU) 5_

•I i ij
^1 m


i i
U) D
1

•>x
1



A
~
I*??I
H
>.



T
•**x'
~
I*?!*!
x*i'
i
3



H
:j:j:j
;>X
>X;
1


-


3C
1
2C
i
1
o

)
;
)
;

                                                                 8
                                            o   a:   »-
                                            x        o
Figure 4-9.  Comparison of selected regional water quality attributes  in  Minnesota streams
           (Minnesota Pollution Control Agency 1988a).
                                      109

-------
Table 4-5. Trends in Stream Water Quality for the Period 1973-1985 in  Minnesota Ecoregions
           (Minnesota Pollution Control Agency 1988a)
Ecoregion
Nitrate + Nitrite
Total Suspended Solids      Ammonia
Northern Lakes and
   Forests
   No Trend
     Increase
Decrease
Northern Minnesota
   Wetlands
   No Trend
     No Trend
                                                                                Decrease
North Central
Hardwood Forests
Red River Valley
Northern Glaciated
Plains
Western Corn Belt Plains
Driftless Area
Decrease
Increase

Increase1
Increase
Increase1
Increase1
Increase1

Increase
Increase1
No Trend
No Trend
No Trend

No Trend
Decrease
Decrease
1  Statistically significant changes greater than p = 0.05.
                                            110

-------
Table 4-6.  Preliminary Estimate of Attainable Stream Water Quality in Minnesota Ecoregions
           (Minnesota Pollution Control Agency 1988a)
Ecoregion
Nitrate + Nitrite    Total Suspended        Total          5-day BOD
                        Solids           Phosphorus
    (mg/L)             (mg/L)            (mg/L)          (mg/L)
Northern Lakes and
   Forests
    0.09
 6.4
0.052
1.7
Northern Minnesota
   Wetlands
    0.08
17.2
0.092
2.2
North Central
   Hardwood Forests       0.29

Red River Valley           0.20

Northern Glaciated
   Plains    ,              0.52

Western Corn Belt Plains    5.62

Driftless Area1
16.1
56.5
65.5
57.5
0.170
0.322
0.271
0.340
3.4
4.2
4.5
5.6
Streams used in Minnesota's ambient water quality program from 1973 to 1985 were culled to select
those that were less impacted. Suggested attainable water quality is the 75th percentile concentration
values for this set of streams.

1  No data available, use estimates of best attainable water for the North Central Hardwood Forests
   Ecoregion.
                                            Ill

-------
Table 4-7. Ecoregion Variables Used in the Minnesota Lake Phosphorus Model MINLEAP (Wilson
           and Walker 1989)
Ecoregion
Runoff   Precip.   Evap.
(cm/yr)   (cm/yr)  (cm/yr)
                     Atmos.
                   Phosphorus
                   Deposition
                   (kg/km2/yr)
                                                                                Ecoregional1
                                                                                Stream TP
                                                                                   ppb
Northern Lakes and Forests
  23
74
61
15
 52
North Central Hardwood
    Forests
  13
75
71
30
148
Northern Glaciated Plains
            64
         76
             20
                   1500
Western Corn Belt Plains
  13
80
74
20
570
   Ecoregional stream TP is a calibrated value estimated from ecoregion  lake data by adjusting
   stream  phosphorus  concentrations  to  give  less  biased  predictions  of  lake  phosphorus
   concentrations within each ecoregion. Note the differences between these values and observed
   stream values (Table 4-6 and Figure 4-9), particularly for the Northern Glaciated Plains.  The
   routine monitoring program is believed to significantly  underestimate average inflowing TP
   concentrations because high flow conditions (when stream phosphorus concentrations often
   increase substantially) are not adequately  monitored.
                                            112

-------
     Water Outflow = [Runoff x Watershed Area] + [Lake Area x (Precipitation - Evaporation)]

         Phosphorus Supply =   [Lake  Area x Atmospheric Deposition] + [Watershed Area  x
                               Runoff x Ecoregional Stream TP]

     This model is intended as a screening tool for estimating lake condition, using a minimum
amount of data to identify problem lakes.  It  can be  used to assess whether a particular lake  is
in better or worse shape than expected for the region (e.g., to identify lakes having unusually high
or low  measured phosphorus concentrations),  given  its location, morphometry, and hydrology.
The  results from  this general assessment can be used to  corroborate  the  results  of the more
detailed models, and may be useful for prioritizing lakes at  a local level relative to the need for
protection  (if the  study  lake is  of substantially higher quality than expected  for the region) or
restoration (if the lake is of substantially lower quality than expected).

4.3.3.5  Management Implications—

     Important regional differences  in both  terrestrial  and aquatic characteristics  throughout
Minnesota dictate that management of these resources take such regional differences into account.
This is  being accomplished in a variety of ways:  regional  summaries of terrestrial and aquatic
characteristics, recognition of different  achievable  goals in  different  regions,  recognition of
different  land use  patterns  that  are partially responsible for  degraded  water  quality,  and
exploration of various approaches for establishing  quantitative goals, criteria,  and methods to
account for situations not readily fitting  regional patterns.  In various reports, Minnesota has
characterized these regional differences and incorporated them into state management strategies,
including the state's nonpoint source program, the Clean Water  Partnership, that was  developed
with the flexibility needed to recognize regional differences.  Table 4-8 summarizes management
goals for lakes  and  streams  of two  regions  that represent the  kinds  of  issues addressed by
Minnesota; Table  4-9 shows  proposed numeric phosphorus criteria for lakes in the four lake
ecoregions.

4.4  POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS AND  FUTURE DIRECTIONS

     Although this report and our research have focused on applications of regional assessment
to surface water issues and management, the regional  analysis approach  described can be used to
evaluate the extent and complexity of other  concerns as well.   A number of themes that are
currently of interest are discussed in this section.  Because the combination of terrestrial  and
climatic information  used  to develop the ecoregion map  (Omernik 1987a) is pertinent to  several
of the issues, the map may be  useful as an upper-level framework.  However, as explained in
Subsection 1.5.2, the relevancy of any framework to an intended use must  be evaluated.
                                             113

-------
Table 4-8.  Overview  and Summary of Regional Characteristics and Management Goals in Two
            Contrasting Minnesota Ecoregions  (summarized primarily from Heiskary and Wilson
            [1988], with information from a number of other sources)

NORTHERN LAKES  AND FORESTS ECOREGION

Regional Characteristics:

     Extensive stands  of second growth forest.
     Numerous lakes.
     Moderate slopes,  with steep slopes along the Lake Superior shore.
     Historic and present land use associated with aesthetic, mineral, and timber resources.
     Intensive land use (wastewater treatment facilities, logging) confined to small areas, not
           widespread.

Stream and Lake Water Quality:

     Generally high quality.
     Water quality in most streams and lakes comparable to that of minimally impacted sites.
     Reference lakes typically have total phosphorus concentration of 14 to 27 jug/L (25th-75th
           percentile of values); average chlorophyll a less than 10 /Jg/L; maximum chlorophyll a less
           than  15 /Jg/L;  Secchi  disk transparencies from 2.5 to 4.2 m (25th-75th percentile of
           values).
     Little seasonal variation in stream water quality.
     Stream water quality problems are probably confined to isolated areas and involve nutrients
           or suspended sediment.

Management Goals:

     Lake protection is a primary goal, especially for lakes supporting a coldwater fishery and lakes
           whose total  phosphorus level is less than 15 to 20 /ig/L.
     Maintain the high transparencies and low chlorophyll a levels of these lakes.
     Total phosphorus concentrations of  14 to 27 jug/L are reasonable and feasible for a majority
           of lakes in this  region.
     For coldwater fishery lakes,  a goal for total phosphorus of less than 10 to 15 /ug/L is desirable
           and feasible.

                                                                                (Continued)
                                            114

-------
Table 4-8. Overview and Summary of Regional Characteristics  and Management Goals in Two
           Contrasting Minnesota Ecoregions (summarized primarily from Heiskary and Wilson
           [1988],  with information from a number of other sources) (Continued)

     For  lakes not supporting  a coldwater fishery, a total phosphorus goal of less than 30 /ig/L
           appears  feasible; at or  below this level, a goal of no measurable increase in trophic
           state is desirable.
     At these  levels of total  phosphorus,  algal scums would be rare and nuisance conditions
           (chlorophyll a concentrations greater than 20 to 30 /Jg/L) would occur less than 10%
           of the time.
     Secchi disk transparencies of greater than 3 to 5 m would be expected more than 50% of the
           time.
     For  lakes with water  quality lower than these goals, small reductions  in total phosphorus
           should  result in detectable aesthetic improvement (e.g., through increased lake clarity
           and reduced frequency of nuisance algal blooms).
     A summary of suggested criteria  is given in Table 4-9.

WESTERN CORN BELT PLAINS

Regional  Characteristics:

     Silt  textured  productive soils.
     Gently rolling terrain; low slopes in most areas.
     Dotted with shallow lakes.
     Well developed stream drainages.
     Agricultural practices well developed; row crop agriculture dominant.
     Numerous small towns.
     Extensive modification to natural drainage patterns.
      Widespread agricultural impacts.

 Stream and  Lake  Water Quality:

      Average  concentrations of water quality attributes are high and appear to  have  increased
           in streams since  1965 to 1970.
      Nitrate/nitrite nitrogen concentrations are exceptionally high relative to other regions.
      Lakes  are shallow, with  mean depth  generally less than 3  m; most are polymictic; the few
           dimictic lakes tend to  have lower total phosphorus concentrations than the others.

                                                                                 (Continued)
                                             115

-------
Table 4-8.  Overview  and Summary of Regional Characteristics and Management Goals in  Two
            Contrasting Minnesota Ecoregions  (summarized primarily from Heiskary and Wilson
            [1988], with information from a number of other sources) (Continued)

     Lakes range from mildly eutrophic  to hypereutrophic; bluegreen algal blooms or extensive
           weed growths are common.
     Reference lake  total phosphorus  values typically  are  from  65  to  150  fJ-g/L;  average
           chlorophyll a ranges from 30 to 80 fig/L and maxima are from 60 to 140 /zg/L; Secchi
           disk transparencies range from 0.5 to 1 m (25th-75th percentile of lakes).
     Predominant uses of  lakes are fishing and wildlife habitat.
     Winterkill in lakes was common before installation of winter aeration devices.
     Relatively few citizen  complaints in 1986 (people probably  know  what to expect in this
           region).
     Few permits issued for chemical algal control in 1986.

Management Goals:
     Minimize extensive algal blooms.
     Total phosphorus  in the range  of 50 to 70 jug/L is necessary to appreciably reduce the
          frequency of blue green algal blooms and allow Secchi disk transparencies in the  1 to
          2 m range.  This should be achievable in the deepest lakes in this region, but will be
          difficult in most others.
     To improve recreational uses  (swimming, aesthetics),   transparencies should remain above
          1 m; this would require an average total phosphorus concentration of 50 [tg/L, a level
          achieved by less than  10% of the lakes in this region. A total phosphorus concentration
          range of 70 to 90 pg/L is a more feasible goal, but use for swimming would only be
          partially attained.
     The few lakes that exhibit total phosphorus  concentrations  below 50 to 70 /zg/L  (e.g., the
          dimictic lakes) are unique for this region, highly valued, and should be managed with
          that in mind.
     For other lakes, implementation of best management practices may be effective if internal
          phosphorus loading is a small fraction  of lake total phosphorus loading.  If internal
          loading  is important, as it often is in this region, implementation of best management
          practices might not be sufficient to  produce detectable changes.
     Before expending lake  restoration funds in this region,  the expected responses  of  the lakes
          should be evaluated carefully because of the difficulty in producing detectable changes.
                                           116

-------
Table 4-9. Most Sensitive Lake Uses and Suggested Phosphorus Criteria for Minnesota Ecoregions
           (Heiskary and Wilson 1988)
Ecoregion
Most Sensitive Uses
                            Phosphorus Criteria
Northern Lakes and Forests
• Drinking water supply
• Cold water fishery
• Primary contact
  recreation and aesthetics
                                < 15 /ig/L
                                < 15 Mg/L
                                < 30 /*g/L
North Central Hardwood Forests
  Drinking water supply
  Primary contact
  recreation and aesthetics
                                < 30 /ig/L
                                < 40 /ug/L
Western Corn Belt Plains
Northern Glaciated Plains
Drinking water supply
Primary contact
recreation and aesthetics
(full support)
(partial support)

Recreation and aesthetics
(partial support)
                                    40
                                  < 40
                                  < 90 /zg/L

                                  < 90 /ig/L
                                             117

-------
     The basic principles of our regional analytical approach are common throughout each of the
 issues below.   Namely,  spatial environmental data is examined to delineate  and characterize
 potential regions; inferences are drawn as to the relative risk in specific regions, or representative
 site data is analyzed to indicate the condition of regional sites under a particular set of influences.

 Cumulative Impacts Assessment on Water  Bodies -  The  extent of the effects  on surface water
 quality from waterway  modification,  waste disposal,  and  terrestrial devegetation is  essentially
 unknown. A regional  framework can be used to organize and analyze environmental data to assess
 the cumulative effects of these management practices.  Because Omernik's (1987a) ecoregions were
 delineated  by considering  the  effects  of  a  number of  interrelated  climatic  and terrestrial
 environmental characteristics  on regional  patterns in water quality, the map should  prove a
 particularly useful  framework for this purpose.
     Three  types of assessment could be considered:  attainable quality, current status,  and best
 management practices. To assess attainable  quality, data from relatively unimpacted sites within
 ecoregions and  subregions, which would be delineated to sort within-region variability,  would
 be  compared with  values from sites impacted  to  varying degrees by various  perturbations.
 Regional water  chemistry and species abundance  and composition data from the sites could then
 be used to develop a quantitative community impact model. Current status would  be determined
 by  randomly selecting a  separate, representative  set of sites to be sampled at regular intervals.
 Values from these  sites  would  be compared to the predicted attainable values  and  extrapolated
 regionally to assess cumulative impacts  and temporal trends.   Where  available,  historical data
 should also be examined  from an ecoregional perspective to provide a greater temporal assessment.
 The effects on water quality from different management practices could  be assessed by comparing
 data from relatively unimpacted reference sites with sites  receiving best management practices or
 treatments of point source pollution.

 Nonpoint Source Pollution -  The issue of diffuse source  pollution is closely related to the study
 of  cumulative  impacts  on  surface  water  quality.    Effects  on  surface  water quality  from
 modification of water courses, irrigation return  flow (e.g., increased  soil and water salinity),
 terrestrial devegetation  from farming,  livestock  grazing, and development, stockyard manure
 disposal, and chemical agents can be sorted through regional analysis of representative surface
 waters.   A regional framework can be used  to  organize and analyze environmental data to assess
 the isolated and combined effects of various management practices.
     Again, Omernik's (1987a) ecoregion map  should be useful for such an evaluation.  As with
assessment of cumulative  impacts on surface  water, nonpoint source assessments could also be
centered around analysis of attainable quality, current status, and  best  management practices.
Attainable water quality would be estimated using data from regionally representative, relatively
 unimpacted sites. The  attainable quality would  represent a  measure of reasonably achievable water
quality,  given  the environmental  characteristics and economic emphases  of each  region  or
                                             118

-------
subregion.   Current status  would be  determined by  randomly  selecting a set of  sites for  data
comparison with the least impacted sites. The effects on water quality from different management
practices could be measured by selecting regionally representative sites that are subject to varying
degrees of impact from single and combined practices.  Effectiveness could be measured  as
differences between the achievable  water quality and that produced in the presence of the  best
management  practice.

Soil Erosion - Our agricultural soils  are threatened by  long-term loss of fertility from erosion due
to management practices related to farming, timber harvest, livestock grazing, and urban and rural
development.  Environmental conditions affecting soil erosion, such as soil type, slope gradient,
and aspect, potential areas of mass soil movement, drainage patterns, and climate can be mapped
to delineate  soil  erosion regions.   Within these  regions, different management practices (e.g.,
irrigation patterns and intensity, tilling practices, timber harvest methods, livestock concentration
and rotation patterns, vegetative cover conditions, and construction techniques) and associated rates
of soil erosion can be compared.  These comparisons can  be used  to  determine which practices
result in the  least  amount of erosion for each region.  Thus,  timber harvest locations, levels, and
methods can be evaluated relative to regional conditions, as  can timing  and intensity of grazing
allotments, and construction activity.

Endangered Species  - Risks to threatened,  endangered, keystone, and game species from pesticides
can be evaluated by examining maps  of known and potential habitats of the species of concern
in concert with maps of pesticide  application patterns.   Potential habitats can be determined
through analysis of coincident distributions of particular environmental characteristics (wetlands,
vegetation, terrain features, etc.).  Patterns of pesticide application  can be estimated from county
records of  crops produced and the types and  timing of pesticides applied to each crop.  Potential
pesticide dispersion can be estimated by  geographic assessment of drainage patterns and soil
characteristics. Acute direct effects and chronic indirect (foodchain, growth, disease, abundance)
effects  on  species of  concern can  be assessed by  field studies of areas  expected to differ  in
impact.  Potential areas  for introduction  or  restoration of game or endangered species can  be
evaluated for suspected  pesticide stress.

Biological  Diversity  -  Local and regional  patterns in  environmental variables affect biodiversity
and the impact of human actions on diversity.  Habitat  types or regions that are particularly rich
in species,  have great abundances of individuals, or support unusual communities with high rates
of  endemism can be  mapped.  Regional analysis of  biogeographic and habitat data can  be
compared with species distributional patterns  and abundance so that, where habitat  conditions are
desirable, managers  can seek to increase those conditions on a regional scale; where  conditions are
undesirable, managers can attempt to reverse those trends, protect critical remnant  ecosystems  in
the region, or expand or reconfigure refugia before  species become  threatened or endangered.
                                             119

-------
 Environmental characteristics common among habitats or regions can be used to develop resource
 management policies that are more protective of biodiversity.

 Groundwater Assessment and Protection -  Groundwater  aquifers may become contaminated by
 nonpoint sources of pesticides and  fertilizers, naturally  occurring  chemicals, and point source
 toxics.   Natural  features, anthropogenic contributions, and human consumption can be spatially
 assessed to predict  the relative  risk of contamination of groundwater with respect to drinking
 water and wellhead  protection.  Some natural environmental characteristics that might be used for
 regional groundwater analyses include:  bedrock porosity and faulting, soil permeability, presence
 of soil  pans or lenses, known geological deposits of salts, cations, and metals, and  frequency of
 surface water-ground water connections (wetlands, influent streams, soil channels).  The spatial
 assessment of these  characteristics would result in a map of groundwater regions.  Overlaying the
 regions would be an array of anthropogenic  impacts that might be assessed from information such
 as the  frequency and location  of wastewater well  injections,  existing  well water  chemistry,
 locations of industries producing water soluble/transportable contaminants, and type and intensity
 of agricultural (including irrigation,  silvicultural and rangeland)  practices.
     Another concern related to groundwater quality  is hazardous  waste siting  and assessment.
 Here, regional characteristics can  be assessed relative to  the effects of siting in any  particular
 region.   Additionally, proximity of proposed and existing sites to human settlements, ranges and
 migratory pathways  of species of interest,  groundwater recharge areas, surface  drainage patterns,
 and distribution of surface waters and wetlands can be superimposed over the proposed  site areas.

 Global  Climate  Change  - The effects of  global  climate  change  on crop production, human
 welfare, and biota may be predicted from regional geographic analyses.  An analysis of current
 soils, potential natural vegetation,  land-surface form, and climate  has led to  the delineation of
 Omernik's (1987a) ecoregions.  Current species ranges,  human population centers, and patterns of
 crops, forage, and forests can be analyzed  in  comparison with ecoregions to  document present
 distribution.  With accelerated climatic change, certain environmental  variables  are likely to be
 more stable over  the next few decades (e.g., geology and land-surface forms) than others (e.g., soil
 potentials, vegetative cover,  agricultural potential, and thus biotic habitats).
     Quantitative variable response models  can be developed  to  predict potential changes in
 environmental resource conditions.   Projected  climates for various  areas can be substituted  for
 current climates  in the models.  The reduction or increase in the predicted range of a  particular
species  under various scenarios offers a quantification of the possible changes. Similar models for
 habitat  requirements and physiological limits of species are commonly used in fish and wildlife
 management.  Additionally,  projected climates and predicted species ranges can be mapped to
study the shift of the less stable variables over the more constant environmental characteristics.
                                             120

-------
4.5  SECTION SUMMARY

     In  this section,  we  have demonstrated  how several  state agencies have  incorporated  an
ecoregion framework into ongoing regulatory and assessment processes.  This framework has been
used to establish biologically oriented standards in two states:  in Ohio, numeric biocriteria were
developed  from  measurements of fish and  macroinvertebrate assemblages  in least impacted
reference streams; in Arkansas, refined use designations  were developed from fish  assemblage
data obtained  at least impaired reference sites.  Also,  in Arkansas, regional criteria for dissolved
oxygen, turbidity and temperature were established. In Minnesota, this framework has been used
to synthesize information on  land  and surface  water  characteristics in  order to help develop a
nonpoint source pollution program and regional  lake management goals.   We  have closed  the
section  with a discussion of areas  of  potential application of this regional approach, including
assessments of cumulative impacts, nonpoint  source pollution,  soil erosion, endangered species,
biological diversity,  groundwater quality, and the effects of global climate change on terrestrial
and  aquatic habitats.
                                            121

-------
                                  SECTION 5

                             REPORT SUMMARY

The United States is not a uniform landscape from border to border.  However, it is not so
complex that is impossible to recognize different natural and cultural land regions. These
regions are relatively homogeneous areas where within-region environmental variability is
less than among-region variability. Thus, a regional framework is a logical way to organize
management of environmental resources.

Regions may be based on many themes.  These may be very specific, such as regions of
summer total phosphorus in lakes, or they may be general, such as aquatic ecosystem regions.
Regions can  be delineated at any level of resolution, depending on objectives.

Numerous regional frameworks have already been developed.  Because of their widespread
availability, a number of these  have  been widely used for management and reporting of
resource conditions, often with misleading  results.

In evaluating the utility of available frameworks for surface water assessment, we learned that
frameworks have repeatedly  been used for purposes other than those for which they were
developed. This discovery led us to develop a synoptic approach that not only helps appraise
the  utility of  existing  frameworks,  but  assists in  developing new, more appropriate
frameworks.  The result of our initial effort for assessing surface water resources is a map
entitled Ecoregions of the Conterminous United States. Since publishing the map, we have
subdivided ecoregions for more  specific state level assessments, and aggregated ecoregions
for more general national level assessments.
Three states have incorporated our  national ecoregional  framework into  their ongoing
regulatory and assessment programs. Arkansas developed ecoregion-specific biological use
designations and regional criteria for dissolved oxygen, turbidity, and temperature of surface
waters. Ohio established regional numerical biocritera for surface waters. Minnesota used
a regional framework to synthesize information on land and surface water characteristics to
accommodate  the development of regional lake  management.  Other states are in various
stages of investigating the framework for management purposes.

The steps of our approach include:  (1) defining appropriate questions, related variables, and
locations of concern, (2) identifying  the environmental characteristics that  affect, or  are
affected by, the variables,  and obtaining spatial reference information  depicting  the
distributions of these characteristics, (3) defining and delineating areas (regions) of relative
homogeneity by synoptically evaluating the spatial distributions of the suite of characteristics,

                                     122

-------
and (4) obtaining numerical data to quantitatively evaluate the correspondence between the
data and the regional framework.

Successful  regional  delineation  depends  upon  careful  selection  of  spatial  reference
information,  awareness  of the  accuracy  and  level  of  resolution  represented  by the
information,  and comprehension  of  the  interactions  among  natural  and  imposed
environmental characteristics.

Successful evaluation of environmental data depends upon the quality, quantity, and spatial
distribution of data values, and the use of appropriate analytical techniques.

Regional  delineation  and assessment  techniques  can  be  applied in  many areas of
environmental research and management. Some potential areas include: cumulative impact
assessment, nonpoint source pollution, soil erosion, endangered species habitat, biological
diversity, groundwater assessment and protection, and the environmental effects of global
climatic  change.   Because the  national ecoregion framework was  based on coincident
distributions of many terrestrial and climatic environmental characteristics, the framework
may be appropriate for use in several  of these areas.
                                     123

-------
                                       SECTION 6

                                   LITERATURE CITED

Abbott, P.O., A.L. Geldon, D. Cain, A.P. Hall, and P. Edelmann.  1983.  Hydrology of Area 61,
       Northern Great Plains and Rocky Mountain coal provinces, Colorado and New  Mexico.
       Water  Resources  Investigations,  open-file report 83-132.   U.S.  Geological  Survey,
       Lakewood, CO.  99 pp.

Anderson, J.R.  1970.  Major land uses.  Map (scale 1:7,500,000).  In:  The  national atlas of the
       United States  of America.  U.S. Geological Survey,  Washington,  D.C. (revised by F.J.
       Marschner). Plates 158-159.

Arkansas Department of Pollution Control  and Ecology.   1988.  Regulation No.  2, as amended
       regulation establishing water quality standards for surface waters of the state of Arkansas.
       Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology, Little Rock, AR. 77  pp.

Austin, M.E.  1972.  Land resource regions and major land resource areas of  the United States.
       Agriculture Handbook 296.  USDA  Soil Conservation Service, Washington, D.C.  156 pp.

Bailey, R.G.  1976.  Ecoregions of the United States.  Map  (scale 1:7,500,000).  USDA Forest
       Service, Intermountain  Region, Ogden, UT.

Baldwin, J.L.  1973.  Climates of the United States.  U.S. Department of Commerce.  NOAA.
       U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.  113 pp.

Bennett, C., J. Giese, B.  Keith, R. McDaniel, M. Maner, N. O'Shaughnessy, and B.  Singleton.
       1987. Physical, chemical, and biological characteristics of least-disturbed reference streams
       in Arkansas' ecoregions. Volume I:  Data compilation.  Arkansas Department of Pollution
       Control and Ecology, Little Rock, AR.  685 pp.

Beschta, R.L. and W.S. Platts.   1986.  Morphological features  of small streams:  Significance and
       function.  Water Resources Bulletin 22:369-379.

Bidwell,  O.W. and  C.W.  McBee.  1973.   Soils of Kansas.   Map (scale  1:1,125,000).  Kansas
       Agricultural Experiment Station, Department of Agronomy, Contribution No. 1359. Kansas
       State University, Manhattan,  KS.
                                           124

-------
Bose, D.R.   1977.   Rangeland resources of Nebraska.  U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil
       Conservation Service.  Society of Range Management, Old West Regional Range Program,
       Lincoln, NB.  121 pp.

Burchett, R.R.  1987.  Mineral resource map  of Nebraska.  Map (scale 1:1,000,000).  Nebraska
       Geological Survey, Conservation and Survey Division, Institute of Agriculture and Natural
       Resources.   University of Nebraska,  Lincoln, NB.

Chaney, T.H., G. Kuhn, and T. Brooks.  1987.   Hydrology of Area 58, Northern Great Plains
       and Rocky Mountain coal provinces,  Colorado and Utah.  Water Resources Investigations,
       open-file report 85-479.  U.S. Geological Survey, Lakewood, CO.  103 pp.

Chronic, J.  and H.  Chronic.  1972.  Prairie, peak, and  plateau:   A  guide to  the  geology  of
       Colorado.  Colorado Geological Survey Bulletin 32.  Denver, CO.  126 pp.

Colorado Bureau of Mines, Mined Land Reclamation Division.  1982. Inactive mines of Colorado.
       Map (scale  1:1,013,760).  Bureau  of Mines, Denver, CO.

Colorado Department of Health,  Water Quality Control Division.  1986.  Colorado water quality.
       Colorado Department of Health, Water Quality  Control Division, Denver,  CO. 58 pp.

	.  1988a.  Colorado nonpoint source assessment report.  Colorado Department
       of Health, Water Quality Control Division, Denver, CO.  159 pp.
      	.   1988b.   Colorado water quality.   Colorado Department of Health,  Water
       Quality Control Division, Denver, CO.  180 pp.
Colorado Land Use Commission.  1974a.  Existing land use.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  Colorado
       Land Use Commission, Denver, CO.

	.  1974b.  Potential for irrigated agriculture.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  Colorado
       Land Use Commission, Denver, CO.
      	.   1974c.  Sediment yield.   Map (scale  1:500,000).   Colorado Land Use
       Commission,  Denver, CO.
                 _.  1974d.  Selected mineral lode resources.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  Colorado
       Land Use Commission, Denver, CO.
                                            125

-------
 Council on Environmental Quality.  1979.  Environmental quality -  1979.  The  Tenth Annual
       Report of the Council on Environmental  Quality.  U.S. Government  Printing Office,
       Washington, D.C.  816 pp.

 Cronquist, A.  1981.   Vegetation Zones.  Map (scale 1:6,000,000).  In:  Atlas of Utah.  Greer,
       D.C., K.D. Gurgel, W.L.  Wahlquist, H.A. Christy, and G.B.  Peterson.  Brigham  Young
       Universtiy Press, Provo, UT.

 Crowley,  J.M.  1967.   Biogeography.  Canadian Geographer 11:312-326.

 deBlij, HJ.  1978. Geography: Regions and concepts.  Introduction.  John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
       New York, NY.  pp 3-8.

 Dierking, R.   1987.   U.S. Geological  Survey,  Soil Conservation Service, Rm.  248,  511  NW
       Broadway, Portland, OR, 97209-3489.  Personal Communication.

 Doesken,  N.J., T.B.  McKee, and B.D.  Richter.   1984.  Analysis of Colorado average annual
       precipitation for the 1951-1980 period. Climatology Report No. 84-4.  Colorado Climate
       Center, Colorado State University, Department of Atmospheric Science, Fort Collins, CO.
       53 pp.

 Driver, N.E., J.M. Norris, and G. Kuhn. 1984. Hydrology of Area 53, Northern Great Plains and
       Rocky  Mountain coal  provinces,  Colorado,  Wyoming  and   Utah.   Water  Resources
       Investigations, open-file report 83-765-479.  U.S. Geological Survey, Lakewood, CO.  93
       pp.

 Duck, L.G. and  J.B.  Fletcher.   1943.   A  game type map of  Oklahoma.  Map (scale approx.
       1:3,200,000).   Oklahoma Game and Fish Department,  Division of Wildlife Restoration.
       Reprinted by Oklahoma Biological Survey, OK.

Environment Canada.   1987.  The potential of soil and bedrock  to reduce acidity of atmospheric
       deposition in Canada.  Map (scale 1:7,500,000).  In:  Acid rain - A national sensitivity
       assessment, resources at risk based on the potential of soils and bedrock to reduce acidity.
       Environmental  Fact Sheet  88-1.  Environment Canada, The Inland  Waters and  Lands
       Directorate, Ottowa, Canada.

Erickson,  K.A. and A.W. Smith. 1985.  Atlas of Colorado.  Colorado Associated University Press,
       Boulder, CO.   73 pp.
                                           126

-------
Fausch, K.D. and L.H. Schrader.   1987.  Use of the  Index of Biotic Integrity to evaluate the
       effects of habitat, flow, and water quality on fish communities in three Colorado Front
       Range rivers. Department of Fishery and Wildlife Biology, Colorado State University, Fort
       Collins, CO.  53 pp.

Fenneman, N.M.   1946.  Physical divisions of the United States.  Map (scale 1:7,000,000).  U.S.
       Geological Survey, Reston, VA.

Gaggiani, N.G., L.J. Britton, and D.R. Minges.  1987.  Hydrology of Area 59, Northern Great
       Plains and Rocky Mountain coal  provinces, Colorado and  Wyoming.   Water Resources
       Investigations, open-file report 85-153.  U.S. Geological Survey, Lakewood, CO.  124 pp.

Gammon, J.R.  1976.  The fish populations of the middle 340 km  of the Wabash River.  Tech.
       Report No. 86.  Purdue  University.   Water Resources Research Center, West Lafayette,
       IN.  73 pp.

	.  1980.  The use of community parameters derived from electrofishing catches
       of river fish as indicators of environmental quality,  pp. 335-363.  In:  Seminar on water
       quality tradeoffs. EPA-905/9-80-009. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington,
       D.C.
Gammon, J.R.,  A.  Spacie, J.L.  Hamelink, and R.L. Kaesler.  1981.  Role of electrofishing in
       assessing environmental  quality of the Wabash River,   pp.  307-324.  In:   Ecological
       assessments  of effluent impacts on communities of indigenous aquatic organisms. ASTM
       STP 703, J.M. Bates and C.I. Weber (eds.).  Philadelphia, PA.

Gauch, H.G., Jr. 1982.  Multivariate analysis in community ecology. Cambridge University Press,
       Cambridge,  MA.  298 pp.

Gersmehl,  P.J.  1977.  Soil  taxonomy  and mapping.  Annals of the Association of  American
       Geographers 67:419-428.

Giese, J.W.  1989.  Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology, 8001 National Dr.,
       Little Rock, AR, 72209.  Personal Communication.

Giese, J., B. Keith, M. Maner,  R. McDaniel, and B. Singleton.  1987. Physical, chemical, and
       biological characteristics of least-disturbed reference streams in Arkansas' ecoregions.
       Volume  II.  Data analysis.  Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology, Little
       Rock,  AR.  148 pp.
                                            127

-------
Godfrey, C.L., C.R. Carter, and G.S. McKee.  Date not provided.  Resource areas of Texas.  B-
        1070.  Texas  Agricultural  Experiment Station, Texas  A&M University, College Station,
        TX.  22 pp.

Godfrey, C.L, G.S. McKee, and  H. Oakes.   1973.   General soil map of Texas.  Map  (scale
        1:1,500,000).    Map  1034.    Texas  A&M  University,  Department  of  Agricultural
        Communications, College Station, TX.

Goettl, J.P., Jr.  1982. Evaluation of sport fisheries potential in fluctuating plains streams.  Final
        report on  project  F-77-R.   Colorado Department of Natural  Resources, Division of
        Wildlife, Fort Collins, CO.  181 pp.

Greer, D.C.,  K.D. Gurgel,  W.L. Wahlquist, H.A. Christy, and G.B. Peterson.  1981. Irrigated and
        potentially arable land.   Map (scale 1:6,000,000).   In:  Atlas of Utah.  Brigham Young
        University Press, Provo,  UT.

Hammond, E.H.  1970.  Classes of land-surface form. Map (scale 1:7,500,000).  In: The National
        Atlas  of the United States of America.  U.S. Geological Survey,  Washington, D.C.  Plates
        62-63.

Hart, J.F.  1982.   The highest form of the geographer's art.   Annals  of the Association of
        American Geographers 72:1-29.

Hausel, W.D., G.B. Glass,  D.R. Lageson, A.J. VerPloeg,  and R.M. DeBruin.  1979.   Wyoming
       mines and minerals. Map (scale 1:500,000). Geological Survey of Wyoming, Laramie, WY.

Heil, R.D., D.S. Romine,  D.C. Moreland,  R.K. Dansdill,  R.H. Montgomery,  and  I.E. Cipra.
        1977.   Soils of Colorado.  Bulletin 566S.  Colorado State  University,  Experiment Station,
       Fort Collins, CO.  39 pp.

Heiskary, S.A. 1989.  Integrating ecoregion concepts into  state lake management programs,  pp.
       89-100. In: Proceedings of the National Conference on Enhancing Statewide Management
       Programs,  Northeastern   Illinois  Planning   Commission   and  North  American  Lake
       Management Society,  May  12-13, 1988, Chicago, IL.

Heiskary, S.A. and W.W. Walker, Jr. 1988.  Developing phosphorus criteria for Minnesota lakes.
       Lake and Reservoir Management 4:1-9.
                                            128

-------
Heiskary, S.A. and C.B. Wilson. 1988. Minnesota lake water quality assessment report. Minnesota
       Pollution Control Agency, St. Paul, MN.  145 pp.

Heiskary, S.A., C.B. Wilson, and D.P. Larsen.   1987.  Analysis of regional patterns in lake water
       quality:  Using ecoregions  for  lake management  in  Minnesota.  Lake and  Reservoir
       Management 3:337-344.

Hendrey, G.R., J.N. Galloway, S.A. Norton,  C.L.  Schofield,  P.W. Schaffer,  and D.A.  Burns.
       1980.   Geological and hydrochemical  sensitivity of the eastern United States  to  acid
       precipitation.  EPA-600/3-80-024. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
       Research Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.  100 pp.

Herbertson, A.J.   1905.   The major natural regions:   An  essay in  systematic geography.
       Geographical Journal 25:300-312.

Hintze, L.F.  1980.  Geologic map of Utah.  Map (scale 1:500,000). Utah Geological and Mineral
       Survey, Salt Lake City, UT.

Hornbaker, A.L.  1984.  Metal mining activity map of Colorado and  directory,  1984. Map (scale
       1:500,000). Map Series 24. Colorado Geological Survey, Department of Natural Resources,
       Denver, CO.

Hughes,  R.M.  1985.  Use  of watershed  characteristics  to select control streams for estimating
       effects  of  metal mining  wastes on   extensively  disturbed streams.    Environmental
       Management 9:253-262.

Hughes,  R.M. and  J.R.  Gammon.  1987.  Longitudinal  changes in  fish assemblages and water
       quality in the Willamette River, Oregon. Transactions of the American Fisheries Society
       116:196-209.

Hughes,  R.M. and  D.P.  Larsen.  1988.   Ecoregions:  An approach  to surface  water protection.
       Journal of Water Pollution Control Federation 60:486-493.

Hughes,  R.M. and J.M. Omernik.  1981.   A proposed approach to determine  regional patterns in
       aquatic ecosystems,  pp. 92-102.   In: Proceedings of the Symposium on the Acquisition
       and  Utilization of Aquatic Habitat  Inventory Information, Western Division,  American
       Fisheries Society, October 28-30, Portland, OR.
                                            129

-------
	.    1983.   An  alternative  for  characterizing  stream size.  pp.  87-101.   In:
       Dynamics  of Lotic  Ecosystems,  eds.  T.D. Fontaine, III and S.M. Bartell.   Ann Arbor
       Science Publishers, Ann Arbor, MI.

Hughes, R.M., D.P.  Larsen, and J.M. Omernik.  1986.  Regional reference sites:  A method for
       assessing stream potentials. Environmental Management  10:629-635.

Hughes, R.M., E. Rexstad,  and C.E.  Bond.  1987. The relationship  of aquatic ecoregions, river
       basins, and icthyogeographic  regions of  Oregon. Copeia  1987:423-432.

Hunt,  C.B.  1979.  Surficial  geology.  Color Proof of  Unpublished Map (scale 1:7,500,000).  U.S.
       Geological Survey, Washington, D.C.

Hurlbert, S.H.  1971. The nonconcept of species diversity:  A critique and alternative parameters.
       Ecology 52:577-585.

If frig, G.F. and M.  Bowles.  1983. A compendium of ecological and natural subdivisions of the
       U.S.  Natural Areas Journal 3:3-11.

Institute of  Agriculture  and  Natural Resources, Conservation and Survey  Division.   1958.
       Irrigation map of Nebraska. Map (scale 1:900,000).  University of Nebraska, Lincoln,  NB.

                 _.   1963.   Topographic  regions  map of Nebraska.  Map (scale  1:1,000,000).
       University of Nebraska, Lincoln, NB.

      	.   1969.  Nebraska soil association map.  Map (scale 1:2,950,000).  University
       of Nebraska, Lincoln, NB.
                     1978.  Center-pivot  irrigation systems  in  Nebraska, 1977.   Map (scale
       1:1,013,760).  University of Nebraska, Lincoln, NB.
       	.   1987.  Center-pivot  irrigation systems  in  Nebraska, 1986.   Map (scale
       1:1,000,000).   University of Nebraska, Lincoln,  NB.
Institute of Agriculture and Natural Resources, Conservation and Survey Division, Remote Sensing
       Center.  1974.  General land use in Nebraska - summer 1973.  Map (scale 1:1,000,000).
       University of Nebraska, Lincoln, NB.
                                            130

-------
lorns, W.V., C.H. Hembree, and  G.L. Oakland.  1965.  Water resources of the Upper Colorado
       River basin - technical report.  U.S. Geological  Survey Professional Paper  441.   U.S.
       Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.  370 pp.

lorns, W.V., C.H.  Hembree, D.A. Phoenix, and  G.L.  Oakland.   1964.  Water resources  of the
       Upper  Colorado River  basin - basic data.  U.S. Geological Survey Professional Paper 442.
       U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.  1036 pp.

Joerg, W.L.G.  1914.  The subdivision of North America into  natural regions:  A preliminary
       inquiry.  Annals of the Association of American Geographers 4:55-83.

Jordan,  G.L.  1981.  Range seeding and brush management on Arizona rangelands. Agricultural
       Experiment Station, Cooperative Extension Service T81121.  University of Arizona, College
       of Agriculture, Tucson, AZ.   88  pp.

Karr, J.R.  1981.  Assessment of biotic integrity using  fish communities.  Fisheries 6:21-27.

Karr, J.R., K.D.  Fausch,  P.L. Angermeier, P.R.  Yant,  and I.J. Schlosser.   1986.   Assessing
       biological integrity in running waters: a method and its rationale. Illinois Natural History
       Survey.  Special Publication 5. Champaign, IL. 28 pp.

Kaufmann, P.R., A.T. Herlihy, J.W. Elwood, M.E. Mitch, W.S.  Overton, M.J. Sale, J.J. Messer,
       K.A. Cougan, D.V. Peck, K.H. Reckhow, A.J.  Kinney,  SJ.  Christie, D.D. Brown,  C.A.
       Hagley, and H.I. Jager.  1988.  Chemical characteristics of streams in the mid-Atlantic and
       southeastern  United States.   Volume I.  Population  descriptions and physico-chemical
       relationships.  EPA/600/3-88/02 la.  U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency, Washington,
       D.C. 397 pp.

Kaul, R.B.  1975.  Vegetation of Nebraska.  Map  (scale  1:1,000,000).  Institute of Agriculture and
       Natural Resources,  Conservation  and Survey Division. University of Nebraska, Lincoln,
       NB.

Kelso, B.S., L.R. Ladwig, and L.  Sitowitz.   1981. Map  and directory of permitted Colorado coal
       mines,  1981.   Map (scale 1:500,000).   Map Series  15.  Colorado  Geological  Survey,
       Department of Natural Resources, Denver, CO.

Kiichler, A.W. 1964.  Potential natural vegetation of the conterminous United States.  American
       Geographical Society, Special  Publication  No.  36.  A. Hoen &  Co., Baltimore, MD.   116
       PP.
                                            131

-------
	.   1970.   Potential natural  vegetation.   Map (scale 1:7,500,000).   In:   The
       National Atlas of the United States of America. U.S. Geological Survey, Washington, D.C.
       Plates 90-91.

Kuhn, G., P.B. Daddow, and G.S. Craig, Jr.  1983. Hydrology of Area 54, Northern Great Plains
       and Rocky  Mountain coal  provinces,  Colorado  and Wyoming.    Water  Resources
       Investigations, open-file report 83-146.   U.S. Geological Survey, Lakewood, CO.  93 pp.

Landers,  D.H.,  J.M. Eilers, D.F. Brakke,  W.S. Overton, P.E. Kellar,  M.E. Silverstein,  R.D.
       Schonbrod, R.E. Crowe, R.A. Linthurst, J.M. Omernik, S.A. Teague, and E.P. Meier.
       1987.  Characteristics of  lakes  in  the  Western  United States.  Volume  1.  Population
       descriptions and physico-chemical relationships. EPA/600/3-86/054a. U.S. Environmental
       Protection Agency, Washington, D.C. 176 pp.

Lanka, R.P., D.B. Inkley, and S.H.  Anderson.   1983.  Wyoming  land cover  map.  Map (scale
       1:500,000).  Wyoming Cooperative Fish  and Wildlife Research Unit,  Laramie, WY.

Larsen, D.P., D.R. Dudley, and R.M. Hughes.   1988.  A regional approach to assess attainable
       water quality:  an Ohio case study.   Journal of Soil and Water Conservation 43:171-176.

Larsen, D.P., J.M. Omernik, R.M. Hughes, C.M. Rohm, T.R. Whittier, A.J. Kinney, A.L. Gallant,
       and D.R. Dudley.  1986.  The correspondence between spatial patterns in fish assemblages
       in Ohio streams and aquatic ecoregions.  Environmental Management 10:815-828.

Lewis, W.M., Jr. and J.F. Saunders, III.  1985.  Physical, chemical, and biological characteristics
       of the South Platte River, Segment 15, in relation to classified  uses.  Metropolitan Denver
       Sewage Disposal District No.  1.  Denver, CO.  159 pp.

Lines,  G.C.  1984.  Hydrology of Area 56, Northern  Great Plains  and  Rocky  Mountain coal
       provinces, Utah.  Water Resources Investigations, open-file report 83-38.  U.S. Geological
       Survey,  Salt Lake City, UT.  69 pp.

Linthurst,  R.A., D.H.  Landers, J.M.  Eilers, D.F. Brakke, W.S.  Overton,  E.P. Meier, and R.E.
       Crowe.  1986.  Characteristics of lakes in the Eastern United States.  Volume 1.  Popula-
       tion descriptions  and  physico-chemical  relationships.    EPA/600/4-86/007a.    U.S.
       Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D.C.  136 pp.
                                            132

-------
Loeffler, C., D. Miller, R. Shuman, D. Winter, and P. Nelson.  1982.  Arkansas River threatened
       fishes survey.  Performance report SE-8-1.  Colorado Department of Natural Resources,
       Division of Wildlife, Denver, CO.  54 pp.

Love, J.D. and A.C. Christiansen.  1985. Geologic map of Wyoming. Map (scale 1:500,000). U.S.
       Geological Survey, Reston, VA.

Lowham, H.W.,  D.A. Peterson, L.R.  Larson, E.A.  Zimmerman, B.H. Ringen,  and K.L. Mora.
       1985.  Hydrology of Area  52, Northern Great Plains and Rocky Mountain coal provinces,
       Wyoming, Colorado, Idaho and Utah.  Water Resources Investigations, open-file report 83-
       761. U.S. Geological Survey, Cheyenne, WY.  96 pp.

Maker, H.J., H.E.  Dregne,  V.G. Link, and  J.U.  Anderson.   1978.   Soils  of New Mexico.
       Agricultural Experiment Station.  Research Report 285.  University of New Mexico, Las
       Cruces, NM.  132 pp.

Mardirosian, C.A.   1971.  Mining districts and mineral deposits of  New Mexico (exclusive of oil
       and gas).  Map (scale 1:1,000,000).  Charles  A.  Mardirosian, Salt Lake City, UT.

McFee, W.W.  1980.  Sensitivity of soil regions to acid precipitation. EPA-600/3-80-013. U.S.
       Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research Laboratory, Corvallis, OR. 179
       PP.

McMahan, C.A., R.G. Frye,  and  K.L. Brown.  1984.   The vegetation types  of Texas, including
       cropland.  PWD Bulletin 7000-120.  Texas Parks and Wildlife Department, Austin, TX.
       39 pp.

Miller, D.L.  1988.  U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Services Division, Box
       25366, Denver Federal Center, Lakewood, CO, 80225. Personal Communication.

Miller, D.L., P.M. Leonard, R.M. Hughes, J.R. Karr, P.B. Moyle, L.H. Schrader, B.A. Thompson,
       R.A. Daniels, K.D. Fausch, G.A. Fitzhugh, J.R. Gammon, D.B. Halliwell, P.L. Angermeier,
       and D.J. Orth.  1988.  Regional applications of an index of biotic integrity for use in water
       resource  management. Fisheries 13:12-20.

Minnesota Pollution Control  Agency.   1986a.  Minnesota water quality:  Water years 1984-1985.
       The 1986 Report to  the  Congress of the United States.  Minnesota  Pollution Control
       Agency,  St. Paul, MN.  69 pp.
                                            133

-------
                  _.  1986b. Protecting Minnesota's waters...The land-use connection. Minnesota
        Pollution Control Agency, St. Paul, MN.  28 pp.
                  _.   1986c.   Report on  the  transparency of Minnesota lakes:  Citizen Lake-
        Monitoring Program.  Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, St. Paul, MN.  245 pp.

       	. 1988a. Minnesota nonpoint source pollution assessment report and appendices.
        Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, St. Paul, MN.  89 pp.
                  _.  1988b.  Minnesota water quality:  Water years 1986-1987.  The 1988 Report
        to the Congress of the United States.  Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, St. Paul, MN.
        Draft.  65 pp.

	1989.  Descriptive characteristics of the seven  ecoregions in Minnesota.
        Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, St.  Paul, MN.  140 pp.

Miser, H.D.  1954. Geological map of Oklahoma.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  U.S. Geological Survey,
        Reston, VA.

Mutel, C.F. and J.C. Emerick.  1984. From grassland to glacier: The natural history of Colorado.
        Johnson Books, Boulder, CO. 238 pp.

New  Mexico Geological Society.   1982.  New  Mexico  highway  geologic  map.   Map  (scale
        1:1,000,000).  New Mexico Geological Society, Socorro, NM.

New Mexico State Engineer and  Interstate Stream Commission.  1968.  New Mexico state water
       plan, land use.  Map (scale  1:600,000).  GPO 780-639.

Ohio Environmental Protection Agency.   1987a.  Biological criteria for the protection of aquatic
       life:  Volume I.   The role of biological  data  in water quality assessment.  Division of
       Water Quality Monitoring and Assessment, Surface Water Section, Columbus, OH. 44 pp.

	1987b.  Biological  criteria for the protection  of aquatic life:   Volume II.
       Users manual for biological field  assessment of Ohio surface waters.  Division of  Water
       Quality Monitoring and Assessment, Surface Water Section, Columbus, OH.  260 pp.
                                            134

-------
      	.  1987c.  Biological criteria for the protection of aquatic life:  Volume III.
       Standardized biological field  sampling  and laboratory  methods  for  assessing fish  and
       macroinvertebrate  communities.  Division of Water Quality Monitoring and Assessment,
       Surface Water Section, Columbus, OH.  80 pp.

      	.   1988.   A comparison of chemical specific, whole effluent toxicity,  and
       biosurvey based evaluations of water quality.  Ohio  Environmental Protection Agency,
       Surface Water Monitoring Section, Columbus, OH.  Draft.
Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Division of Wastewater Pollution Control.  1983. Manual
       of Ohio EPA surveillance methods and quality assurance practices.  2nd draft. Columbus,
       OH.

Ohio Environmental Protection Agency,  Division of Water Quality Monitoring and Assessment.
       1988. Ohio water quality inventory:  1988 305(b) report.  Volume I, Executive Summary.
       Ohio  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  Division  of  Water  Quality  Monitoring  and
       Assessment, Columbus, OH.  118  pp.
Oklahoma  Agricultural Experiment Station.   1959.   Soil  map of  Oklahoma.
    ,   1:1,584,000).  Oklahoma Agricultural Experiment Station,  Stillwater, OK.
Map  (scale
Omernik, J.M.  1977. Nonpoint source—stream nutrient level relationships: A nationwide study.
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.
       EPA-600/3-77-105.  150 pp.

	.   1987a.   Ecoregions  of the conterminous  United States.  Annals of the
       Association of American Geographers 77:118-125.

      	.   1987b.   Ecoregions  of the Northeast States.   Map  (scale 1:2,500,000).
       EPA/600/D-87/313.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental  Research
       Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.
	.   1987c.   Ecoregions  of the Southeast States.   Map  (scale 1:2,500,000).
       EPA/600/D-87/314.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental  Research
       Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.

Omernik,  J.M. and A.L.  Gallant.   1986.  Ecoregions  of  the  Pacific Northwest.   Map  (scale
       1:2,500,000).  EPA/600/3-86/033. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
       Research Laboratory,  Corvallis, OR.  39 pp.
                                           135

-------
      	.  1987a.   Ecoregions of the South Central States.  Map  (scale  1:2,500,000).
       EPA/600/D-87/315.   U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency, Environmental  Research
       Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.

      	.   1987b.   Ecoregions  of the Southwest  States.   Map  (scale  1:2,500,000).
       EPA/600/D-87/316.   U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency, Environmental  Research
       Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.

      	.  1987c.   Ecoregions of the West Central States.  Map  (scale  1:2,500,000).
       EPA/600/D-87/317.   U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency, Environmental  Research
       Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.

      	.  1988.   Ecoregions of the Upper Midwest States. Map  (scale  1:2,500,000).
       EPA/600/3-88/037.   U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency, Environmental  Research
       Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.  56 pp.
Omernik, J.M. and G.E. Griffith. 1986. Total alkalinity of surface waters: A map of the Upper
       Midwest region. Map (scale 1:2,500,000).  Environmental Management 10:829-839.

Omernik, J.M.  and  A.J. Kinney.  1985. Total alkalinity of surface waters:  A map  of the New
       England and New York region.   EPA-600/D-84-216.  U.S.  Environmental Protection
       Agency, Environmental  Research Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.  11  pp.

Omernik, J.M., M.A. Shirazi, and R.M. Hughes.  1982.  A synoptic approach for regionalizing
       aquatic  ecosystems,  pp.  199-218.  In:  In-place  resource  inventories:  Principles and
       practices.   T.B. Brann,  L.O. House IV, and  H.G. Lund  (eds.).   Society of American
       Foresters,  Bethesda, MD.

Omernik, J.M., C.M. Rohm, S.E. Clarke,  and D.P. Larsen.  1988.   Summer  total phosphorus in
       lakes: a map of Minnesota, Wisconsin,  and Michigan. Environmental Management 12:815-
       825.

Packer, P.E., C.E. Jensen, E.L.  Noble, and J.A. Marshall.   1982. Models to estimate  revegetation
       potentials  of land surface mined for coal in the West.  Intermountain Forest and Range
       Experiment Station, General Technical Report INT-123.  U.S. Department of  Agriculture,
       Forest Service, Ogden, UT.  25 pp.
                                            136

-------
Plafkin,  J.L., M.T.  Barbour, K.D. Porter,  S.K. Gross, and R.M. Hughes.    1989.   Rapid
       bioassessment protocols for use in streams and rivers: Benthic macroinvertebrates and fish.
       EPA/444/4-89/001.  U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency, Office of Water Regulations
       and Standards, Washington, D.C.  In press.

Price,  D.  1987.  Hydrology of  Area 57, Northern Great  Plains and  Rocky Mountain coal
       provinces, Utah  and Arizona.   Water Resources  Investigations, open-file report 84-068.
       U.S. Geological Survey, Salt Lake City, UT.  63  pp.

Propst, D.L.   1982.   The warmwater  fishes  of  the  Platte River system, Colorado,  1978-1980.
       Colorado Division of Wildlife, Fort Collins, CO.   161  pp.

Robinson, A.H., R.D. Sale, and J.L Morrison.  1978. Elements of cartography.  4th Ed.  John
       Wiley and Sons.  448 pp.

Rohm, C.M., J.W. Giese,  and  C.C.  Bennett.   1987.    Evaluation  of an  aquatic  ecoregion
       classification of streams in  Arkansas.  Journal of Freshwater Ecology 4:127-140.
Rowe, J.S.  and  J.W.  Sheard.    1981.   Ecological  land classification:
       Environmental Management 5:451-464.
A  survey approach.
Roybal, F.E.  1983.  Hydrology of Area  60, Northern  Great Plains and Rocky Mountain coal
       provinces, New Mexico, Colorado, Utah and Arizona.  Water Resources Investigations,
       open-file report 83-203. U.S. Geological Survey, Albuquerque, NM.  80 pp.

Ruiter, D.E. and M.B. Bishop.  1984a.  The surface water hydrology, water quality, and aquatic
       life of the Colorado-Utah oil shale region.  EPA-908/3-84-002.  U.S. Environmental
       Protection Agency, Office of Policy and Management, Denver, CO.  882 pp.

	.  1984b.  The surface water hydrology, water quality, and aquatic life of the
       Yampa  River basin, Colorado-Wyoming.   EPA-908/3-84-003.   U.S. Environmental
       Protection Agency, Office of Policy and Management, Denver, CO.  430 pp.

SAS Institute, Inc.   1985.  SAS user's  guide:  statistics, version 5 edition.   SAS Institute, Inc.,
       Cary, NC.  956 pp.

Saunders, J.F., W.M. Lewis, Jr.  and G.W.  Kling.   1982.   A survey  and analysis of existing
       information  on aquatic  ecosystems  in  northwest  Colorado.  University of  Colorado,
       Northwest Colorado Wildlife Consortium, Boulder,  CO.  184 pp.
                                           137

-------
Scanlon, A.H.  1983.  Oil and gas fields map of Colorado.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  Map Series
       22.  Colorado Geological Survey, Department of Natural Resources, Denver, CO.

Society of American Foresters. 1980. Forest cover types of the United States and Canada.  F.H.
       Eyre (ed).  Washington, D.C.  148 pp.

Udvardy, M.D.F.  1975. A classification of the biogeographical provinces of the world. IUCN
       Occasional Paper No. 18.  IUCN, Merges, Switzerland.

Ugland,  R.C., J.T. Steinheimer, J.L. Ebling,  and R.D. Steger.   1987a.  Water resources data,
       Colorado, water year 1986.   Volume  1.  Water-Data Report CO-86-1.  U.S. Geological
       Survey, Water Resources Division, Denver, CO.  345 pp.

Ugland,  R.C., J.T. Steinheimer, R.G. Kretschman, E.A. Wilson, and J.D. Bennett.  1987b.  Water
       Resources Data, Colorado,  water year 1986.  Volume  2.  Water-Data  Report CO-86-2.
       U.S. Geological Survey, Water Resources Division, Denver, CO.  434 pp.

University of  Arizona Agricultural  Experiment  Station and Cooperative  Extension  Service,
       Department of Agricultural Economics and Agricultural Engineering.  1963.  Irrigated areas
       in Arizona.  Map (scale 1:1,013,760).  25M-November 1963-Folder  100.  University of
       Arizona, College  of Agriculture, Tucson, AZ.

	.  1965.  Arizona natural vegetation.  Map (scale  1:1,352,000). Bulletin A-45.
       University of Arizona, Tucson, AZ.

U.S. Department  of Agriculture.  1981.  Land resource regions and major land resource areas of
       the United States.   Agricultural  Handbook 296.   U.S.  Government Printing Office,
       Washington, D.C.  156 pp.

U.S. Department  of  Agriculture,  Forest Service.  1985.  Major habitat types, community types,
       and plant communities in the Rocky Mountains.   Rocky Mountain Forest  and Range
       Experiment Station,  U.S.  Department of Agriculture, Forest Service General Technical
       Report RM-123, Fort Collins, CO.  105 pp.

U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service.  1970.  Distribution of principal kinds
       of soils: Orders, suborders, and great  groups. Map (scale 1:7,500,000).  In:  The National
       Atlas of the United States of America. U.S. Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. Plates
       86-87.
                                            138

-------
	. 1972a. Grazing capacities under average rainfall and management conditions,
 New Mexico. Map (scale 1:1,500,000). M7-0-22596. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil
 Conservation Service,  Portland, OR.

	. 1972b. Natural vegetation, Colorado. Map (scale 1:1,500,000).  M7-E-22390.
 U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Portland, OR.
           _.  1974a.  Erosion, New Mexico.  Map (scale  1:1,000,000).  4-R-33771.  U.S.
 Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.

	.  1974b.   General soil  map of New Mexico.  Map (scale 1:1,000,000).  4-R-
 34,583.  U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Albuquerque,  NM.
           _.  1974c.  Land treatment map, New Mexico.  Map (scale 1:1,500,000).  4-R-
 33924.  U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service,  Albuquerque, NM.

	.  1974d.  Vegetation map of New Mexico.  Map (scale 1:1,500,000).  4-R-
 33925.  U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service,  Albuquerque, NM.
	.  1975a.  Arizona general soil map.  Map (scale 1:1,000,000).  M7-S-23465.
 U.S.  Department  of Agriculture, Soil  Conservation  Service and  University  of  Arizona
 Agricultural Experiment Station, Tuscon, AZ.

	. 1975b. General soil map, Wyoming. Map (scale 1:1,500,000).  M7-SE-23543.
 U.S.  Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Portland, OR.
	.  1975c.  Selected soil features and interpretation for major soils of Arizona -
 supplement to Arizona general soil map. M7-N-23465-1. U.S. Department of Agriculture,
 Soil Conservation Service, Portland, OR.   23 pp.

	.  1977.   Vegetative types  and land resources areas. Map  (scale  1:1,500,000).
 M7-SE-16189.  U.S.  Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Portland, OR.
           _.   1986a.   Cropland,  Kansas.   Map (scale 1:3,168,000).  4-R-39677.  U.S.
 Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.
	.  1986b. Erosion areas, Kansas.  Map (scale 1:3,168,000).  4-R-39534.  U.S.
 Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.
                                      139

-------
                 _.   1986c.   Farmsteads, Kansas.  Map  (scale  1:3,168,000).  4-R-39680.  U.S.
       Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.

       	.   1986d.  General prime farmlands, Kansas.  Map (scale  1:3,168,000).  4-R-
       39536.  U.S.  Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.
                 _.  1986e.  General soil map, Kansas.  Map (scale 1:3,168,000).  5-8-32,550.  U.S.
       Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.

      	.   1986f.  Important wildlife habitat map, Kansas.  Map (scale 1:3,168,000).
       REV 1-85, 5 S-37 431.  U.S.  Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort
       Worth, TX.
                 _.  1986g.  Irrigated acres, Kansas.  Map (scale  1:3,168,000).  4-R-39678.  U.S.
       Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.

      	.   1986h.   Land use, Kansas.   Map (scale 1:3,168,000).   4-R-39679.   U.S.
       Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.
                 _.  1986i.  Sediment sources map, Kansas.  Map (scale 1:3,168,000). 5 S-37,432.
       U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Lincoln, NB.

      	.  1986J.  Tributary flooding,  Kansas.  Map (scale 1:3,168,000).  5 S-37 433.
       U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.
                 _.   1986k.   Woodlands, Kansas.  Map (scale 1:3,168,000).  4-R-39682.   U.S.
       Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, Fort Worth, TX.

U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service of Wyoming. 1986. Precipitation zones
       for technical range site descriptions. Map (scale approx. 1:3,379,000). General Technical
       Guide, Section I-B.

U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census. 1973.  1969 census of  agriculture. Volume
       5.  Special  Reports.  Part  15.  Graphic summary.   U.S.  Government Printing Office,
       Washington, D.C.  145 pp.

	.   1978.   1974 census  of agriculture.  Volume 4.  Special Reports.  Part 1.
       Graphic summary.  U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.   189  pp.
                                            140

-------
                 _.   1982.  1978  census of agriculture.  Volume 5.  Special Reports.  Part 1.
       Graphic summary.  U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.  177 pp.

      	.   1986.   1982 census of agriculture.   Volume 2.   Subject Series.   Part 1.
       Graphic summary.  U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.  188 pp.
U.S. Department  of Commerce,  National  Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.    1974.
       Climates of  the  states.    Water Information Center  Publication.   2 Volumes.    Port
       Washington, NY.  982 pp.

U.S. Geological Survey.  1963.  State of Kansas. Map (scale 1:500,000). U.S. Geological Survey,
       Reston, VA.

	.  1979.  Geologic map of Colorado.  Map (scale  1:500,000).  U.S. Department
       of the Interior, Geological Survey, Reston, VA.
                 _.  1980a. State of Colorado.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  U.S. Geological Survey,
       Reston, VA.
                 _.   1980b.   State of New  Mexico.  Map (scale  1:500,000).   U.S.  Geological
       Survey, Reston, VA.
                 _.  1980c. State of Wyoming.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  U.S. Geological Survey,
       Reston, VA.
                 _.  1981.  State of Arizona.  Map (scale 1:500,000).  U.S. Geological Survey,
       Reston, VA.
                 _.  1982a.  Hydrologic unit map of the United States.  Map (scale 1:7,500,000).
       U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
                 _.   1982b.  State of Texas.   Map (scale 1:500,000).   U.S.  Geological Survey,
       Reston, VA.
      	.  1986.  National water summary 1985:  Hydrologic events and surface-water
       resources.  Water-Supply Paper 2300. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
       506 pp.
                                            141

-------
                     Various  years.  Maps (scale 1:250,000).  Topographic  map  series.  U.S.
       Geological Survey, Reston, VA.

Warren, C.E.  1979.  Toward classification and rationale for watershed management and stream
       protection.  EPA/600/3-79/059.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
       Research Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.  143 pp.
Washington, H.G.  1984.  Diversity, biotic and similarity indices:  a review with special relevance
       to aquatic ecosystems.  Water Resources 18:653-694.
Whittier, T.R., and C.M. Rohm.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research
       Laboratory, 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR, 97333.  Unpublished data.

Whittier, T.R., R.M. Hughes, and D.P. Larsen. 1988. The correspondence between ecoregions and
       spatial patterns in stream ecosystems in Oregon.  Canadian Journal of Fisheries and Aquatic
       Sciences 45:1264-1278.

Whittier, T.R., D.P. Larsen, R.M. Hughes, C.M. Rohm,  A.L. Gallant, and J.M. Omernik.  1987.
       The Ohio stream regionalization project: a compendium of results.  EPA/600/3-87/025.
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.
       66 pp.

Wiken,  E.   1986.   Terrestrial  ecozones  of Canada.  Environment Canada.   Ecological Land
       Classification Series No. 19.  Ottawa, Ontario.  26 pp.

Wilson,  B.  1986.  Lands in New Mexico irrigated with ground water, surface water, and ground
       and surface water  combined. Map, Figure 3 (scale 1:3,643,000).  In: Water use in New
       Mexico in  1985.   Technical Report 46.  New Mexico State Engineer, Water Use  and
       Reports Section,  Santa Fe, NM.

Wilson,  C.B.  1989.  Lake quality modeling used in Minnesota, pp. 33-43.  In:  Proceedings of
       National Conference on Enhancing State Lake Management Programs,  Northeastern Illinois
       Planning Commission and North American Lake Management Society,  May, 1988, Chicago,
       IL.

Wilson,  C.B., and W.W. Walker, Jr.  1989.  Development of lake assessment  methods based upon
       the aquatic ecoregion concept. In:  Proceedings of the 8th Annual International Symposium
       of the North American Lake Management Society, November  1988, St. Louis, MO.   In
       press.
                                           142

-------
Wilson,  L., T.B. Hutchings, and P.  Shafer.  1981.  Predominant Soils.  Map (scale  1:6,000,000).
       In:  Atlas of Utah.  Greer,  D.C., K.D.  Gurgel, W.L.  Wahlquist, H.A. Christy, and G.B.
       Peterson.  Brigham Young University Press, Prove, UT.

Wilson,  L., M.E. Olsen, T.B. Hutchings, A.R. Southard, and AJ. Erickson.  1975. Soils of Utah.
       Bulletin 492.  U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation  Service and Utah State
       University Agricultural Experiment Station, Logan, UT.  94 pp.

Yoder, C.  1989. Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, P.O. Box 1049,  1800 Watermark Dr.,
       Columbus, OH, 43266.  Personal Communication.
                                            143

-------
                                      APPENDIX A
         References Used to Define  and Delineate Ecological Subregions of Colorado
Climate
    Doesken et al. 1984
    U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service of Wyoming 1986
    U.S. Department of Commerce, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration  1974
Geology
    Hintze  1980
    Love and Christiansen 1985
    Miser 1954
    New Mexico Geological Society 1982
    U.S. Geological Survey 1979
Land Use
    Colorado Land Use Commission 1974a,  1974b
    Greer et al. 1981
    Institute of Agriculture and Natural Resources, Conservation and Survey Division 1958, 1978,
        1987
    Institute of Agriculture and Natural Resources,  Conservation and Survey  Division,  Remote
        Sensing Center 1974
    New Mexico State Engineer and Interstate Stream Commission 1968
    University of Arizona Agricultural Experiment  Station and Cooperative Extension  Service,
        Department of Agricultural Economics and Agricultural Engineering 1963
    U.S. Department of Agriculture 1981
    U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service 1972a, 1974c, 1986a, 1986c, 1986d,
        1986g, 1986h
    U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau  of the Census 1986
    Wilson 1986
                                           144

-------
Mineral Extraction

    Burchett 1987
    Colorado Bureau of Mines, Mined Land Reclamation Division 1982
    Colorado Land Use Commission 1974d
    Hausel et al. 1979
    Hornbaker 1984
    Kelso et al. 1981
    Mardirosian 1971
    Scanlon 1983
Soils
    Bidwell and McBee  1973
    Colorado  Land Use  Commission 1974c
    Godfrey et al. 1973
    Heil et al. 1977
    Institute of Agriculture and Natural Resources, Conservation and Survey Division 1969
    Maker et al.  1978
    Oklahoma Agricultural Experiment Station 1959
    U.S. Department of  Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service 1970,  1974a, 1974b, 1975a, 1975b,
        1975c, 1986b, 1986e, 1986i
    Wilson et al. 1975
    Wilson et al. 1981                              ;

Topography/Physiography

    Institute of Agriculture and Natural Resources, Conservation and Survey Division 1963
    U.S. Geological Survey 1:250,000 topographic maps, various years

Vegetation

    Cronquist 1981
    Duck and Fletcher 1943
    Jordan  1981
    Kaul 1975
    Kilchler 1964
    Lanka et  al.  1983
    McMahan et al.  1984
                                           145

-------
    Packer et al. 1982
    Society of American Foresters  1980
    University of Arizona  Agricultural Experiment Station and Cooperative Extension Service,
        Department of Agricultural Economics and Agricultural Engineering 1965
    U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service  1985
    U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service  1972b, 1974d, 1986f, 1986k

Water Resources

    Colorado Department of Health,  Water Quality Control Division 1986,  1988a, 1988b
    lorns et al.  1964
    lorns et al.  1965
    Ugland et al.  1987a,  1987b
    U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service  1986J
    U.S. Geological Survey 1984, 1986

Summaries of More than One  Characteristic

    Abbott et al.  1983
    Bose 1977
    Chaney et al.  1987
    Chronic and Chronic 1972
    Driver et al. 1984
    Erickson and Smith 1985
    Gaggiani et al. 1987
    Godfrey unkn. publ.  date
    Kuhn  et al. 1983
    Lines  1984
    Lowham et  al.  1985
    Mutel and Emerick 1984
    Price 1987
    Roybal 1983
    U.S. Department of Agriculture,  Soil  Conservation Survey 1977
    U.S. Geological  Survey  1963, 1980a, 1980b,  1980c, 1981, 1982b
                                           146

-------
                                       APPENDIX B

                Study Designs Used by State Agencies in Arkansas and Ohio

    This information provides background  for several examples used in the text and should be
consulted for descriptions  of  rationale, design, and results.  A list of references is included for
each state.

            ARKANSAS  - Arkansas Department  of Pollution Control and Ecology

Goal:  Evaluate the physical, chemical,  and biological  characteristics of least disturbed streams in
watersheds of various sizes within each ecoregion  in  Arkansas. Apply data acquired as part of
this study to develop realistic water quality standards and designated uses.

Ecoregion Delineation:  Arkansas contains parts of six ecoregions as delineated on Ecoregions of
the South Central States (Omernik and Gallant 1987c).  The regions are:

            Arkansas Valley
            Boston Mountains
            Mississippi Alluvial Plain  (aka Delta)
            Ouachita Mountains
            Ozark Highlands
            South Central Plains

Watershed Sizes:  A range  of watershed sizes representative of  each region was selected to include
all possible beneficial  uses for  the streams.   Watershed sizes varied from approximately 45  to
1,350 km2, allocated into three size classes, 50 to 130 km2, 260 to 520 km2, and 775 to 1,300 km2,
for sampling over  the  three-year period of the study.

Site Selection:   Lists of least impacted, candidate streams were developed from evaluating the
locations of known dischargers and consulting the  Arkansas Department of Pollution  Control and
Ecology staff to exclude streams with known pollution sources,  including nonpoint source pollution
problems.   The lists were reduced by extensive field evaluation to confirm suitability as  least
disturbed, yet  regionally representative, sites.

Sampling Periods:  Two sampling intervals were selected to represent critical periods for aquatic
life in Arkansas streams:  (1) Late summer (August  and early September) characterized by low
flow,  high water temperatures, and low dissolved oxygen, and  (2) Spring spawning season (March)
when  dissolved oxygen requirements for fish reproduction are critical.
                                             147

-------
 Streams were sampled from spring 1983 through fall 1985; a few streams were also sampled during
 spring 1986. Each stream was surveyed twice, once during spring and once during late summer;
 a survey required one week.  Small streams were sampled the first year, intermediate streams the
 second, and large streams the third year.

 Stream Attributes Sampled:
Chemical:   Dissolved oxygen (72-hour continuous measurements at two sites during the
                survey interval)
            Ammonia-nitrogen
            Orthophosphate
            Biochemical oxygen demand
            Total phosphorus
            Nitrate + nitrite nitrogen
            Chloride
            Sulfate
            Total iron
            Alkalinity
            Hardness
            Manganese

Physical:    Temperature (72-hr continuous at oxygen sites)
            Turbidity
            Total suspended solids
            Total dissolved solids
            Specific conductivity

Biological:   Fecal coliform
            Chlorophyll a
            Macroinvertebrate assemblages
            Fish assemblages

Physical     Stream flow
Habitat:     Stream gradient
            Mean channel width
            Mean stream width
            Mean stream velocity
            Estimated mean depth
            Stream substrate
            In-stream cover

                                            148

-------
            Pool/riffle ratio
            Riparian area
            Bank stability
            Percent canopy

Number of Stream Sites and Watershed Sizes by Ecoregion:
REGION
  NUMBER
 OF SITES
WATERSHED SIZE (km2)
Arkansas Valley
Boston Mountains
Mississippi Alluvial
   Plain
Ouachita Mountains
Ozark Highlands
South Central Plains
     6
     6
     4

     6
     6
     9
    44
   120
    60

    50
    45
    60
-   795
-   965
    120

-   935
-  1,360
-  1,170
Estimated Costs (J. Giese,  pers. comm.):
           Total Cost1
           Source
           Duration
           Staff (FTE)3
$360K
 205(j) (CWA)
 4 Yrs.2
 6
Summary Reports:  For greater detail, consult:  Bennett et  al. (1987), Giese et al. (1987),  and
Rohm, et al. (1987).
     1Includes 10-15% for equipment and supplies.
     2Includes 3 sampling years and 1  year of data analysis and writing.
     Includes project  leader,  senior fish and macroinvertebrate biologists (full-time), data base
     manager, chemists, field technicians (part-time).
                                            149
                                             151

-------
 Number of Streams:
                                                                   Western
                 Eastern Corn  Erie/Ontario   Huron/Erie  Interior  Allegheny
      Site  tvoe   Belt Plains      Lake Plain    Lake Plain  Plateau   Plateau   Statewide
Fish  Wading          7            10           21          34        41        113
      Boat             7             7           10          12        39         75
      Headwater       2            10           23          16        19         70
      Total
16
27
54
                                                            62
                                                99
                                             258
Macroinvertebrates    31
             19
Estimated Costs (C. Yoder, pers. comm.):
      Total Cost4
      Source
      Duration
      Staff (FTE)6
             45
               $480K
                2050) (CWA)
                4 Yrs.5
                8
            48
                                                                      89
                                                          232
Summary  Reports:  For greater detail, consult:  Larsen et al. (1986, 1988), Ohio Environmental
Protection Agency (1987a,  1987b,  1987c); Whittier et al. (1987).
    ^Includes  10-15% for equipment and supplies.

    Includes  2 sampling years and 2 years data analysis and writing.

    Includes  project leader, senior fish and macroinvertebrate biologists (full-time), data base
     manager, chemists, field technicians (part-time).

                                           152

-------
                                                    PLATE 1

                                           COLORADO SUBREGIOh
DNS  OF COLORADO
ES M. OMERNIK

mental Protection Agency
illis, Oregon 97333
 21-4
      Fort
     ,Coll|ns
       i  25-3
 i Boulder

-------
ECOLOGICAL  SUBR



                  By ALISA L. GALLAh

                 NSI Technology Services Corf
                  Coryallis, Oregon 37333

-------
WYOMING  BASIN (18)
                                                                             SOUTHERN  ROCKIES (21)
  18-1
Semiarid to Arid Shrublands
    CLIMATE—Semiarid to arid. Much of subregion receives less than 300mm annually,
        but, in entirety, the area receives less than 400mm (drier in Wyoming, precipita-
        tion averaging 175mm in some areas). Precipitation mainly in spring and fall.
    PHYSIOGRAPHY—Irregular basin terrain with isolated mountains and plateaus. Local
        relief generally greater than 30m, often greater than 120m (steep side slopes of
        uplands can have 180m of local relief).
    LAND USE—Extremely low density rangeland for beef cattle and sheep.
    VEGETATION—Widely scattered shrubs. Sagebush-dominated Shrublands include big
        sagebrush mixed with various shortstem grasses (e.g., wheatgrass, needle-and-
     i.  thread, Indian ricegrass). Saltbush-dominated Shrublands include saltbushes,
      s  greasewood, various shortstem grasses. Rocky Mountain juniper and pifion pine
        on some uplands.
    SOILS-Entisols.                                                     *
COLORADO PLATEAUS (20)

          Desert  Shrubiands

    CLIMATE—Semiarid to arid. 200 to 400mm precipitation over most of subr.egion, a
        few areas up to 500mm.
    PHYSIOGRAPHY-Irregular plains to tablelands with local relief commonly between
        200 to 300m.
    LAND USE—Rangeland. Of three Colorado Plateau subregions, this generally best
        for grazing, but quality still low.                                      '
    VEGETATION—Sagebrush shrubland; includes  big sagebrush, rabbitbrush, assprted
        drought-resistant grasses (e.g., wheatgrass, Indian ricegrass, bluegrass).
    SOILS—Aridisols and Entisols.
 20-2
Saltdeserts
    CLIMATE—Arid. Less than 250mm precipitation annually, mostly in fall and spring.
    PHYSIOGRAPHY-Nearly level to irregular valley floors.
    LAND USE—Mostly rangeland for beef cattle and sheep. Irrigated agriculture con-
        centrated in river valleys where there is perennial stream flow from neighboring
        mountainous ecoregions. Orchard crops (apples, peaches, pears, cherries), hay,
        grain, and vegetables (e.g., onions, beans) cultivated in these valleys.
    VEGETATION—Saltbush shrubland; includes saltbush, greasewood, rabbitbrush,
        horsebrush, grasses (Indian ricegrass, galleta).
    SOILS—Aridisols and Entisols.
 20-3
Wooded Uplands
    CLIMATE—Semiarid to arid. 200 to 400mm precipitation over most of subregion,
        greater than 600mm around Douglas Pass in Garfield County, CO.
    PHYSIOGRAPHY-Tablelands; local relief often from 200 to 300m.
    LAND USE—Rangeiand for beef cattle and sheep. Of three Colorado Plateaus
        subregions, this generally worst for grazing (rockiest terrain, farthest from sur-
        face water supply, lowest concentration suitable forage).
    VEGETATION—Juniper and pifion  pine woodland. Grass and  shrub understory
        includes wheatgrass, Indian ricegrass, grama, sagebrush.
    SOILS—Aridisols and Entisols.
      High  Elevation  Tundra
                                                                                 CLIMATE—Cold, humid to arid. Annual precipitation from 750-1500mm, mostly as
                                                                                     snow, but much is removed by strong winds.
                                                                                 PHYSIOGRAPHY-Mountaintops. Local relief 300-600m.
                                                                                 LAND USE—Wildlife habitat, recreation. Use limited by inaccessibility most of year
                                                                                     (snow-free only 4-6 weeks, some portions perennially covered).
                                                                                 VEGETATION—Above treeline (starting around 3,300-3,600m elevation) vegetation
                                                                                     such as low growth shrubs, cushion plants,  and forbs. Forest-tundra interface
                                                                                     sparsely colonized by stunted, deformed Englemann spruce, subalpine fir, limbe
                                                                                     pine, and  bristlecone pine.
                                                                                 SOILS—Pergelic Cryumbrepts and Cryochrepts,  formed largely from crystalline rocks
                                                                                     rock outcrops.
                                                                                       ?21-2| Cool and Moist Forests of the Middle to High Elevation!
CLIMATE—Cool humid. 750-1,000mm annual precipitation for most of subregion,
    mainly as snow, remaining on ground well into summer months.
PHYSIOGRAPHY—Steep, forested slopes of Rocky Mountains from about
    2,700-3,300m elevation. Local relief steep, often 300 to 600 or more meters.
LAND USE—Wildlife habitat, recreation, and mineral extraction. Grazing limited by
    climatic conditions, lack of forage vegetation, and inaccessibility from exces-
    sively steep terrain and lingering snowpack.
VEGETATION—Dense forests dominated by Englemann spruce and subalpine fir;
    some areas locally dominated by aspen. Sparse forest understory.
SOILS—Rock outcrops, Cryoboralfs and Haploborolls weathered from a variety of
    crystalline and sedimentary materials.


      Warm and Dry Forests of the Middle to  Low Elevations

CLIMATE—Warm, dry. Around 400-750mm annual precipitation, as snow and rain.
    Snow-free period at least four months.
PHYSIOGRAPHY—Lower to mid-elevation  (1,700-2,700m) mountain slopes. Steep
    local relief, 300-400m.
LAND USE—Livestock grazing, wildlife habitat, mineral extraction, recreation.
VEGETATION—Variety of communities: aspen, Douglas-fir, ponderosa pine, Gambel
    oak,  and pifion pine-juniper woodlands.
SOILS—Borolls, Boralfs. Derived from variety of crystalline and sedimentary rocks
    under variety of conditions existing between cold, humid, high elevation forests
    and warm, semiarid, low elevation shrubs and grasslands.


      Low to Middle Elevation Semi-Desert Shrublands

CLIMATE—Semiarid. 300-400mm annual precipitation.
PHYSIOGRAPHY—Rolling to irregular terrain of lower to mid-elevation mountains.
    Local relief 60-300m.
LAND USE—Grazing. Areas adjacent to large perennial  streams irrigated.
VEGETATION—Shrubland of greasewood,  four-winged saltbush, shadscale, and
    sagebrush, often interspersed with grasses.
SOILS—Borolls. Derived from variety of sedimentary and crystalline rocks.

-------
^IZONA/NEW MEXICO PLATEAU  (22)

IPj  Shrublands
 CUMATE-SamlwU, 230-450mm annual precipitation.
 PHYSIOGRAPHY— Irregular plains, moderate to high  relief plateaus, and open, low
    mountain*. Local rollof from 30m on Irregular plains, to 300m or more near high
    tabWandt.
 LAND USE—Low density livestock grazing. Mostly beef cattle and sheep.
 VEGETATION—Communities range from Shrublands of big sagebrush, rabbitbrush,
    and wfnterfat to grasslands of western wheatgrass, green needlegrass, blue
    grama, and noedla-and-throad.
 SOILS—Mostly Argids, also Psammaquents and Orthents.
2-2
Irrigated Flattands
 CLIMATE—Acid. 200mm or lets annual precipitation.
 PHYSIOGRAPHY—Flat to tow rellof plains. Local relief minimal to a few meters.
 LAND USE-krigalod agriculture. Main crops Include: barley, malt, alfalfa, small
     grains, hay, Irish potatoes, and a few other assorted vegetables.
 VEGETATION—Originally Shrublands dominated by shadscale saltbush and grease-
     wood. Natural vogo!atk>n removed for cropland acreage.
 SOILS-Mostly Argtds, also Psammaquents and Orthents.
2-3
Saltdeserts
 CttMATE-Altd.
 PHYSIOGRAPHY—Irregular plains of tow to moderate relief. Local relief from several
     moieis, to tons of motors, to 60m.
 LAND USE—Low !o very low density livestock grazing. Mostly beef cattle and sheep.
 VEGETATION—Shrublands dominated by shadscale saltbush and greasewood; sage-
     brush, horsebrufn, spiny hopsage, rabbitbrush, saltgrass and alkali sacaton also
     occur,
 SOILS—Mosity ArgWs, also Psammaquents and Orthents.
WESTERN  HIGH  PLAINS (25)

         Rolling Sand Plains                                 -

   . CLIMATE—Semiarid. 200-300mm annual precipitation.
   PHYSIOGRAPHY-Sandy hills. Local relief often around 15m.
   LAND USE—Rangeland. Small plots of irrigated agriculture scattered throughout
       subreglon where reliable groundwater supplies occur.
   VEGETATION—Sand reed, bluestem, sand dropseed and sand sage.
   SOILS—Ustic Torripsamments formed from eolian deposits.

         Moderate  Relief Rangeland

   CLIMATE—Semiarid. 200-300mm annual precipitation.
   PHYSIOGRAPHY—Irregular plains. Local relief usually from 15 to 30m, sometimes
       45m.
   LAND USE-Rangeland.
   VEGETATION—Mainly blue grama, often with western wheatgrass, galleta, alkali
       sacatoh and four-wing saltbush interspersed.
   SOILS—Ustolls. Some Aridisols. Formed from sediments.

         Flat to Rolling Cropland

   CLIMATE—Semiarid. 200-300mm annual precipitation.
   PHYSIOGRAPHY-Rolling plains. Local relief a few to 15m.
   LAND USE—Dryland agriculture.
   VEGETATION—Mainly blue grama, often with western wheatgrass, galleta, alkali
       sacaton and four-wing saltbush interspersed.
   SOILS-Ustolls.
                                                                         SOUTHWESTERN TABLELANDS (26)

                                                                                  Grasslands

                                                                             CLIMATE—Semiarid. Much of area in Colorado receives 300-400mm precipitation.
                                                                                 Large area in west central portion receives less than 300mm.
                                                                             PHYSIOGRAPHY—Irregular plains and tablelands of moderate local relief, generally
                                                                                 between 15-30m.
                                                                             LAND USE—Rangeland. Exception occurs along Arkansas River where perennial
                                                                                 water supply and sufficiently flat terrain coincide.
                                                                             VEGETATION—Mainly blue grama, often with western wheatgrass, galleta, alkali
                                                                                 sacaton, four-wing saltbush, sand dropseed, three-awn, sand reed, bluestem,
                                                                                 sideoats grama, and yucca interspersed.
                                                                             SOILS—Ustollic Haplargids and Camborthids, Ustic Torriorthents.
                          vvEPA
                 Ua ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                ENVtRONMENTAL RESEARCH LAB-CORVALUS
                                1989

-------
               I
          '•9
                   \
».^*"
                                 »>p-_  ©^
                                    4=^
                           •  a*4
                           ' O

                           @» 9

                           «  %-.
                           ^s^a-1
      r»
                 w
             l»«  1£
              **"  JlKtfr-zr
              ,«
               ,»e«t^
»

f
                             g.

                             ^^

                              «
                               f/i
                                   9
                          PLATE 2
                 CONDUCTIVITY
                            from
          STORE! Ambient Stream Stations
                       in Colorado
                             by
                      Thomas R. Whittier
                      NSI Technology Services Corp.
                       Corvallis, Oregon 97333
                      0  kilorr

                        MAP SCALI
) Compiled by s! H. Azevedo

-------
                                                                      PLATE 2
                                                              CONDUCTIVITY
IJKCiCO
               Station Medians Otmhos) for samples since 1/78
                                  3  <250
                                  •  250-500
                                  •  500-1000
                                  •  1000-2000
                                  •  2000-3000
                 "°              •  >3000
                         See Plate 1 for ecoregion names
   vvEPA
US. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LAB-CORVALUS

-------
                                              PLATES
                                  KJELDAHL-NITROGEN
Station Medians (mg/l) for samples since 1/78
                »  <0.5
                •  0.5-1.0
                •  1.0-1.5
                •  1.5-2.0
               •  2.0-4.0
                  >4.0
           Plate 1 for ecoregion names
   xvEPA
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LAB-CORVALLIS

-------
                        PLATE 3
            KJELDAHL-NITROGEN
                         from
          STORET Ambient Stream Stations
                     in Colorado
                          by
                    Thomas R. Whittier
                    NSI Technology Services Corp.
                     Corvallis, Oregon 97333
0  kitotn

 MAPS
Map Compiled by S. H. Azevedo

-------